JP2020010921A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine that can execute variable display of performance identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player includes performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that stops and displays the performance identification information in a specific mode for a predetermined period from the start of the variable display and executing a special performance which is different from the specific performance and suggests to be controlled to the advantageous state at the start of the variable display. The performance execution means can execute the special performance when a predetermined period is elapsed at the time of execution of the specific performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventional gaming machines are capable of performing a variable display of effect symbols (effect identification information) and capable of executing an effect (specific effect) of stopping an effect symbol for a predetermined period from the start of the variable display. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2005-212762

  However, in Patent Literature 1, when there is an effect (special effect) other than the specific effect that can be executed from the start of the variable display, the interest is reduced unless the special effect is executed at an appropriate timing. There is a problem that it will.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, a gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player. ,
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a freeze effect) in which the effect identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner for a predetermined period from the start of the variable display, and the effect is different from the specific effect and is controlled to the advantageous state. Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display shown in FIGS. 10-10) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a countdown effect) indicating that the effect is performed when the variable display is started. Part),
When executing the specific effect, the effect executing means can execute the special effect when the predetermined period elapses (for example, when the execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined, FIG. As shown in FIG. 9 (B), the part where the countdown effect starts from the end timing of the freeze effect)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the special effect is executed at an appropriate timing after the predetermined period corresponding to the specific effect has elapsed, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The ratio controlled in the advantageous state is different between the case where the specific effect and the special effect are executed and the case where the special effect is executed without executing the specific effect (for example, FIG. 10-7). As shown in the figure, when the countdown effect and the freeze effect are executed, the ratio of the change display result to the big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be the highest, and only the countdown effect is executed without executing the freeze effect. In this case, the part where the fluctuation display result is a big hit is set lower than when the countdown effect and the freeze effect are executed)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed, and it is possible to improve interest.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect in a plurality of modes having different lengths of the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion in which a freeze effect can be executed in the case of seconds and in a case of 3 seconds), and the special effect can be executed at a timing corresponding to the length of the predetermined period of the specific effect to be executed (for example, a modified example) As shown in FIGS. 10-20 as 140SG-1, a portion capable of executing a countdown effect from the timing when each freeze period has elapsed),
The ratio controlled in the advantageous state differs according to the length of the predetermined period (for example, when the freeze period is 3 seconds as shown in FIG. The part where the fluctuation display result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is higher than when the period is 1 second)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, a special effect can be executed at an appropriate timing corresponding to a specific effect having a different period, and the player can pay attention to the length of the predetermined period, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
It is possible to execute variable display of small production identification information (for example, small design 138SG005s) smaller than the production identification information in synchronization with the variable display of the production identification information,
The variable display of the small effect identification information is also executed when the effect identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (L), during the execution of the freeze effect). , While the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 138SG005s is executed.)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, even when the effect identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific effect, it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being executed based on the small effect identification information.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying at least an image related to the special effect,
The effect execution means can display a suggestion image indicating that the special effect is executed at least during execution of the specific effect on the display means (for example, FIG. 10-21 as a modified example 140SG-2). As shown in B), a portion displaying the image 138SG005a of the counter displayed as “under preparation” on the image display device 5),
During the execution of the specific effect, the display mode of the suggestion image is not changed (for example, as illustrated in FIGS. 10-21 (B) to 10-21 (D) as a modified example 140SG-2, the execution of the freeze effect) (The part where the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter is not changed from the state in which “Preparing” is displayed)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, during the execution of the specific effect, the display mode of the suggestion image does not change together with the stop display of the identification information for effect, so that the matching with the specific effect can be achieved.

  It should be noted that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of notice effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates the production control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various big hits. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern for loss determination table. It is a flowchart showing a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value confirmation process. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of a RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is an explanatory view showing a notification mode at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control process processing. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process in a modified example. It is a flow chart which shows a part of effect control main processing in a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. It is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. (A) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a big hit type determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the content of various big hits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a countdown effect and a freeze effect, and a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect mode of a countdown effect. (A) is a timing chart at the time of execution of a countdown effect in a failure pattern, and (B) is a timing chart at the time of execution of a countdown effect in a success pattern. (A) is a timing chart at the time of execution of a freeze effect, and (B) is a timing chart at the time of execution of a countdown effect and a freeze effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure showing a display mode of an image display device in a countdown effect. It is a figure showing a display mode of an image display device in a countdown effect. It is a figure showing a display mode of an image display device in a countdown effect and a freeze effect. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the initial value in a modification. It is a timing chart of a countdown effect in a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize port that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol display device 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the big hit symbol is obtained. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the state is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared. The type has been set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit game state is ended, the time may be controlled to a time saving state or a certain change state depending on the big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time of fluctuating fluctuating time (period of fluctuating fluctuating figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "per-figure hit" in the frug drawing game is improved than in the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is therefore an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  The time saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. The condition that the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the processing is not executed).

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative design variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effects include a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By executing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later, and various tables) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or exit) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start-up switch (first start-up switch 22A and second start-up switch 22B), count switch 23). (Such as a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle enters) and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game state (for example, start and end of variable display, opening state of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, number of storages held, game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating a lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (Step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after finishing the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  When receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, the start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer is interrupted, and manages the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of storages to be held, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of storages to be held, and pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning start-up thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", or the big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the order of winning the game balls into the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning the order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types using a random value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a prior determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The fluctuation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol (reach or not, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. (Such as the type of reach effect), and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change process includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol change reaches the special figure change time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol change processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. If the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set in accordance with, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on the processing of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. For determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of times of execution of the round for opening the big winning port has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether the number of times of execution of the round has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like for performing a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit number of executions, The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is performed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt is generated due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interruption permission, and then ends the command reception interruption processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the CPU executes the effect control process process (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative luminous body such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the camera, is performed. Further, with respect to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 in FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the processing of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like designating the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect processing in step S172 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output are performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such an effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect process. Also, when the reception waiting time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the wait process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls based on the set contents at the end of the small hit game state. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In the big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize. However, the game media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed game machine may be used.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the extinguishing of the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player, If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form that is distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-1, PA1 of the non-reach-losing pattern in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode and the display result is "losing". -2. The display results are "big hits" such as reach loss variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "losing". Are prepared. PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach AE are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability when each reach is executed (big hit reliability) is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B). Normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach Reach B <Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. In addition, during the super-reach reach effect, an advanced effect that evolves (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A illustrates a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves to a super-reach one step higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of the reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. As described above, the notification of the title is executed by the effect device of the reach with the higher reliability than the reach with the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively instigated, and the production effect can be improved. The notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of the production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 8B and FIG. 8C are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect production operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” stops, and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the super-reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the super-reach effect (also referred to as the super-reach effect) ends, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of super reach A (here, the character of "SP reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound (here, "super reach A") corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is performed, the subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which the characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a friendly character wins, a big hit occurs, and if the friendly character loses, a loss occurs.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Also, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8E, and may be displayed as subtitles in a lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super-reach effect is started, such as when the introduction part of the super-reach effect ends, the title 31AK005 of the super-reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. (Here, the character “SP Reach B”) is displayed, and a sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach B is displayed. Be informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-2 (G). Is performed, the subsequent part of the reach effect of the super reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect is shown to the player, and the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And super reach B (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G)...) In the introduction part before the title is announced, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). In this way, the player can be noticed which super-reach is to be made since the super-reach effect is started, and which title is to be notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to the completely common production mode until the title is announced. At least one super-reach can be determined by watching the production, for example. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introductory part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) may be executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. As described above, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed at a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At the same time, a sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8, thereby notifying the title of the super reach D. As described above, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  It should be noted that the notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is announced in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the expectation degree of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. You may.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8J, the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach reach of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is performed. Be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Then, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title information without stopping the progress of the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the super reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in a super-reach reach production with high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach effect, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Also, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expectation degree suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, an indication of the degree of expectation is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, and the expectation degree may be indicated by a meter or a gauge, or may be indicated. May be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars may be displayed, and the number of stages of the degree of expectation may be increased. .

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a predetermined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case in order to improve the effect.

  Note that, here, the effect of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, but for example, a title notification or an expectation suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decided production)
When it is time to derive the display result (the end of the variable display) after each reach effect has been executed, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is executed. The determined effect includes a determined effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a determined effect indicating that the display result is "losing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, a fixed effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8C, and as shown in FIG. A definitive decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the fixed effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and sharp title notification can be executed.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 and the variable display is executed. The way of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach effect may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, when the character display which is resident during the hold display, the active display, and the variable display, and the display related to the mobile communication are displayed on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately not displayed during the super-reach reach effect so as to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the extended effect is executed when the reach effect of super reach D is executed (the title notification of super reach D is executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, in the case of developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the title of Super Reach A is announced, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. In the case of developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8D, the title of Super Reach B is announced, and Reach production of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title information of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), but may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (indicating failure). It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as a performance in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured to display the black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, when informing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the degree of expectation indication display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed step by step each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has been accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expected degree suggestion effect has been completed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 8A to 8F, black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more items may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be raised by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. The same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, and fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like need only be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 8-5 (G) to (L) are examples of the production operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion production when the special mode is set when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black diamonds corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted so as to shine. In this way, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is specified. However, depending on the production mode (the state when the reach production is executed), another reach production (title notification, expectation degree) is performed. (Including a suggestion effect) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be made different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the effect according to the preference of the player can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is indicated by the number of black stars in the degree of expectation indication display, and an expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. May be executed in such a manner that the number of displays suggesting is gradually reduced. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to, or instead of, the expectation effect effect of the present embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, in the case where the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the title of Super Reach D is announced, and after the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). An extended effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character of “SP Reach C”) is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C). , The title of Super Reach C is announced. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title information of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination. Under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. Note that, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title and the expected degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, a title announcement for announcing the jackpot reliability is executed as an announcement effect according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach A is displayed. Is notified, a title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B). As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) is changed is executed, after the title display mode has been changed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or an advanced effect that improves the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of increasing the degree of expectation can be executed, and thus the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute a title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing", for example, at a determination ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8A, the display color of the title of the super reach is changed from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and from “black” to “fruit pattern”. The ones that change and those that change from “red” to “fruit pattern” are provided, and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). In other words, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the title display color changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  The “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be made different. In the case of a super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a different rate from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line, etc.) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute a speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C) according to whether the display result is “big hit” or “losing”. As shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), the display colors of the dialogue in the reach effect include “white”, “red”, and those that change from “white” to “red”, in this order (ascending order). ) Has increased the jackpot reliability. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, in the case where the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same announcement mode is achieved. In addition, the big hit reliability may be made different by a combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing so, it is possible to focus attention on the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialog may be determined at a different rate from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, in place of the dialogue announcement, an announcement effect for notifying the jackpot reliability based on a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other notice effects and the effect form are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination process ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, the title advance notice and the dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of the super reach, but in the case of the specific super reach (for example, other than the super reach with low reliability), the title advance notice is provided. And at least one of dialogue notices may be made executable. In addition, the title announcement and the dialogue of the dialogue have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, even if the determination ratio is changed according to the type of super reach. Good. By doing so, a notice effect can be executed according to the type of the reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image and the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result regarding the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the speech notice changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the effect and the effect of the line notice (the ratio of the effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) the effect changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a line in accordance with the effect content of the reach effect (for example, an effect of a character or an effect in a battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the display of the title and the degree of expectation may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the image display device 5 notifies the title, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the expected degree suggestion display. By doing so, it is possible to display the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to title information relating to other effects (notice of mainly displaying characters). You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different on the image display device 5, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission ("Let's reach at 7", "Eliminate enemies using a stick controller", etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to title notification of a mission.

(Modified Example 31AK-1 of Characteristic Part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, the determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and thereafter, the display result is displayed ( FIG. 8-3 (B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is displayed in accordance with the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super reach effect operation in the modification 31AK-1 in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. After reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the character 31AK041 which is a friend character and the character which is an enemy character 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  8C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5 along with the reach effect. Thereby, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. The big hit reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in the modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may be different depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Thereafter, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), the regulation line 31AK044 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K), the stick image 31AK051 is moved to the center part. Is displayed, and a display urging the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a fixed decoration symbol which is a big hit combination is derived. If an operation is not detected within a predetermined operation validity period, an image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In the modification 31AK-1, the operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The reliability of the big hit in the case of being done is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the expectation of the player is improved. Can be maintained.

  8-10 and 8-11, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but the reach effect shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination of the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, whether or not there is an effect effect) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modified Example 31AK-2 of Characteristic Part 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability and displayed with a plurality of types of elements included in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title of red characters). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When the shutter display and the reach title display are performed, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and notifies the game effect lamp 9 by emitting light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8A, when the shutter effect is performed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the shutter that has been closed is opened, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, at the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed at the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "Battle Reach" indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is performed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of issuing a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability, such as "hot hot", is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the common sound and the specific sound have completely separated output periods has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character "BATTLE WIN!" Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is over, the display returns to the original variable display screen with the numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 8F, all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. This makes it possible to suitably display the fruit pattern image in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thus, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8A is larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8D are displayed at different timings. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be performed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. 8-8. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Also, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Explanation about the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. Note that a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 122SG of the present embodiment is the same as the above-described feature section 31AK, and thus a description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 122SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 122SG051 for switching between a setting change state in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed and a setting confirmation state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be checked. A setting changeover switch 122SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later in a setting change state, and an opening sensor 122SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Is provided.

  The setting switch main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052, is housed in the board case 122SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052. Is exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear left portion of the substrate case 122SG201 so that the device can be operated without opening the substrate case 122SG201.

  Since the board case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 3 in a closed state. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 by using it. Further, since the lock switch 122SG051 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like at a game arcade, only a store clerk having the setting key can operate the lock switch 122SG051. The lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation) by using a setting key. In the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are exemplified as separate keys, but these keys may be shared by one key.

  Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 122SG003 opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 9-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 9A, the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), a result of determining whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), And different EXT data are set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9C, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) and the type of the generated error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormal) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormal) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormal) has been determined to be generated on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening that notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening or the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up by clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation of changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a set value check start notification command for notifying that the operation of checking the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 has been started (that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in a setting change state) wp. The command E106H is a set value check end notification command for notifying that the set value check operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program and fixed data, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103. It comprises a random number circuit 104 for performing, an input / output port (I / O) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes and temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 Reading operation, CPU 103 receiving an input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, CPU 103 outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the characteristic portion 122SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for determining the ordinary figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. It should be noted that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  In this embodiment, an example is shown in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 9-5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the fluctuation display result is “losing”, the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is “big hit”. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss fluctuation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “loss”. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of the normal reach is performed in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is the super reach variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β. It is set shorter than. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is performed, The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach are set so that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” so that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time is, the higher the expectation of big hit is.

  In the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these variation patterns are classified into non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, and the like. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after the determination beforehand, only the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number for pattern type determination, the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined. It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-5, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern becomes the normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that is executed twice and results in a non-reach loss, a pseudo continuous effect is executed three times and a variation pattern that results in a super-reach loss is obtained.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7 and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various types of determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11 and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. And a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), and FIG. -6 (C), a display result determination table (set value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), and a big hit type determination shown in FIG. 9-7 (B). In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), a large hit variation pattern determination table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a loss variation pattern determination table, a general figure display result determination table (not shown), and a general figure variation pattern determination table (not shown) ) Etc. are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (winning rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value, a winning probability (winning rate) of a big hit and a small hit is changed. Has become. The set value has three stages from 1 to 3; 3 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 3 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 2 and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value, which is the largest value 3, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the value in the order of 2, 1 becomes the more advantageous value for the game arcade side.

  FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special maps.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probable change state (high-precision state), the normal state or the time-saving state (low) (Determination state) is assigned to the special map display result of “big hit”. Thereby, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/250 when the set value is 2, and 1/99 when the set value is 3) In comparison, the probability that the special map display result is determined to be controlled to the big hit game state with the “big hit” as the big hit is increased (in the feature section 122SG of this embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/150, and the set value is 1/99 for 2 and 1/50 for 3 That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state (high-accuracy state), the probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is determined, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be the small hitting game state and controlled to the small hitting game state is the same. Have been. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), the special figure display result is set to “small hit” to control the small hit game state regardless of the game state and the set value. Then, the probability of being determined is set to 1/200. Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the form in which the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” and the control is made to control the small hitting game state regardless of the set value is the same probability is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state by setting the special figure display result to “small hitting” may be changed according to the set value.

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is set to “big hit” or “small hit”, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is low, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the special map display result is set to "big hit" or "small hit". The determination value is assigned so that the probability of being determined to be controlled when the state is controlled is increased (big hit probability and small hit probability: setting value 3> setting value 2> setting value 1).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines that the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). If any of the hit determination values match, the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). When MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be set as the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit gaming state. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hitting game state. However, the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the display probability determination tables shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability per small hit is the same regardless of which display result determination table is used (regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). It may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). However, a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table are separately provided for each set value, and it is individually determined whether or not the fluctuation display result is a big hit or a small hit. Is also good. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), a judgment value is assigned to each small hit in each display result judgment table. In the display result determination table (display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1), the determination value may not be assigned to the small hit. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

  FIGS. 9-7 (A) and 9-7 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among them, FIG. 9-7 (A) determines the big hit type by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol is changed and displayed). It is a table in the case of doing. In addition, FIG. 9-7 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

  The big hit type determination table indicates that the big hit type is one of the big hit A to the big hit C based on the hit type determining random number (MR2) when the change display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine.

  Here, the big hit type in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as the big hit type, a big hit A (also referred to as a non-probable variable big hit) in which only the time-saving control is executed after the big hit game state ends and the state shifts to the low-probability high-base state, After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and a big hit B or a big hit C (also referred to as a positive variable big hit) which shifts to the high-accuracy high-base state is set.

  The jackpot game state by the "big hit A" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called ten rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time-saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by “big hit A” is executed by executing a predetermined number of special figure games (100 times in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment), or The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before the figure game is executed.

  On the other hand, the high-precision control and the time-saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continued until the big hit occurs again after the big hit game state is ended. Therefore, when the jackpot that has recurred is the jackpot B or the jackpot C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed without going through the normal state. , A so-called extended-villa state.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example in which three types of big hits A to big hits C are provided as big hit types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may provide less than the kind, or four or more kinds.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  As described above, when the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is ended is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game is ended. Of the big hit B and the big hit C in which both the positive change and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C becomes lower in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 1 when the payout rate is the lowest.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, if the set value is “1” in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, from 0 to 299 of the determination value range of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. (No judgment value is assigned to the big hit B).

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Among the big hits B and big hits C in which both the positive hit control and the positive change control are executed, the ratio for determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 1 when the payout rate is the lowest.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, if the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In the case where the determination rate of the jackpot type is different depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, a case where the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B may be provided. .

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is the big hit varies depending on the set value set, so that the gaming interest can be improved. It has become.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random value for big hit type determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination may be performed using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous to the player (the bigger hit probability and the smaller hit probability are increased, and the big hit C as the big hit type is determined. Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous the player may be. .

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the form in which the gaming property itself does not change is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is set to a gaming property (a so-called probability variation loop type) in which the probability variation state loops at a rate of 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable prize ball device 7 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, the game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to the certain change state, while the ratio of the game balls passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special figure (so-called V). If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during the high base (during the time reduction control). Ball is specially variable A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as 1 to 3, the gaming property is the same. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Furthermore, when changing the playability according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable prize ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes the predetermined region, Used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the fact that a game ball has passed the predetermined switch, It may be used as a switch for controlling to a big hit game state.

  The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for a big hit which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and the variation display result is “small hit”. A variation pattern determination table for a big hit that is used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for a loss that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “losed” is prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (the jackpot A) used when the jackpot type is the jackpot A is used. ) And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance. A) and the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) include the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and the super reach β big hit For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number within a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take The value is assigned as the judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, one of the determination value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 Up to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern of 826 to 997 is allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the range of the determination value of MR3 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 301 to 800 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is allocated, and the fluctuation patterns 801 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), in the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C), when the set value is “1”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, , 1 to 100 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 101 to 350 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 351 to 997 are assigned to the It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, from 1 to 997 of the determination value range of MR3, 1 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit.

  As described above, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. Higher, and lower in order of set values 3, 2, 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may determine that “big hit B” or “big hit C” may be obtained. Expectations can be increased.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) is the determination value. Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9C, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is 1, 2, or 3, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 0. Of 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. With the setting values 1, 2, and 3, the variation pattern of the small hit may be determined at a different ratio from the plurality of variation patterns.

  Further, the loss variation pattern determination table includes a loss variation pattern determination table A that is used when the number of retained storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the time saving control is not performed in the game state, and a low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and variation for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned to the variation pattern of β loss (PA2-3) as the determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low base medium total pending storage number), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach, which correspond to the total number of stored storages of 2 to 4, respectively. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the loss variation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 Are allocated to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are allocated to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach that correspond to the total number of stored memories of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the loss variation pattern determination table C (for five or more low base medium total pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time reduction control. PA2-2) and a variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

  As shown in FIG. 9D, in the loss variation pattern determination table D (for high-base medium use), when the set value is “1”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. Loss variation patterns (PA2-2) are assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  As described above, when the loss variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach variation pattern is , Set values 3, 2, and 1 in this order. Further, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the variation values of 701 to 900 among the determination values are the variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the variation patterns of the super reach β loss regardless of the variation pattern determination table. If the fluctuation display result is lost, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by the common determination ratio regardless of the set value, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined. It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  It should be noted that the “common determination ratio” in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is not only the one in which the determination ratio is completely the same with different set values (the characteristic portion 122SG in the present embodiment), but also different set values. (For example, the setting ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is different by about 1% among the setting values 1 to 3).

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the fluctuation display result is a loss, regardless of the set value, the non-reach, the normal reach, and the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of the super reach are the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although an example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is lost, the super reach α The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss, regardless of the set value. Exemplifies a mode in which the set value is the same regardless of the set value that is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the set value, the change ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern is different according to the set setting value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value that is present, there may be one or more undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation patterns and the normal reach fluctuation patterns. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value that has been set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100%. It also includes the determination of the percentage.

  The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach loss variation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The variation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 9-5). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, and the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of four. Sometimes, when the start winning is made, it becomes difficult to cause useless starting winning in which the holding memory is not made, and when the number of the holding memories is reduced, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss without shortening the fluctuation time is long. By determining PA1-1), it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the variable display time is lengthened.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to 9-10 (C), the variation is determined by using a loss Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern may be determined using a different loss pattern determination table depending on the number of stored special symbols and the variation display of the second special symbol (in the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol).

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any numerical value from 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the super reach loss The range of random numbers assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the losing probability are different depending on the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the super-reach losing variation pattern (the super-reach losing variation pattern) (Appearance rate) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the super reach loss variation pattern varies according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display is performed at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the super reach loss. It may be executed in a variation pattern.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is retained for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, a game control counter, and the like. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

  The first special map holding storage unit stores the special map which has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has been generated. The game data (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the first start winning opening and establishes the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 and the like based on the The storage is performed until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure game is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

  The second special map holding storage unit stores a special winning start (second starting winning) when a game ball passes (enters) a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, but the starting has not yet started. The game data (a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special map holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the second starting winning opening and establishes the second starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 and the like based on the It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will be made.

  It should be noted that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The general figure holding storage unit stores the general figure holding information that has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 yet, even though the game ball passing through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls passed through the pass gate, and based on the passing of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result determination from the random number circuit 104 and the like. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, a game control main process in the feature section 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (122SGSa002). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is ON, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014. If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is ON. When the backup flag is OFF and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed-up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (122SGSa005). . In 122SGSa005, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped by using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the effect control board 12 is activated (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has expired (122SGSa008). If the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not expired (122SGSa008; N), 122SGSa007 is executed again, and a period of time is waited until the effect control board 12 is activated. When the effect control board activation start waiting timer has expired (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009).

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 is open (122SGSa009a). When the open sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa009a; Y), a set value confirmation process for displaying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed, and the salesclerk at the game hall displays the set value. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in a state where the user can confirm the set value by visually checking the monitor 122SG029 (setting change state) (122SGSa010). When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa009; N) or when the release sensor is OFF (122SGSa009a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa011 after the execution of the set value confirmation process. That is, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is operated without being operated, the set value is confirmed if the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. It is impossible.

  In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in a state before the power cut-off, transmits a command at the time of recovery including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

  In 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the effect control board 12 is activated. Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has expired (122SGSa016). If the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not expired (122SGSa016; N), 122SGSa015 is executed again to stand by until the effect control board 12 is activated. When the effect control board activation start waiting timer is out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then turns the lock switch 122SG051 ON. It is determined whether or not there is (122SGSa018).

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa018; N), the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start, transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021 ( 122SGSa019).

  Further, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa019a). If the open sensor is ON (122SGSa019a; Y), that is, if the gaming machine frame 3 is open, a setting change process (122SGSa020) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 And the process proceeds to 122SGSa021. That is, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is operated and activated, even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, the set value cannot be changed unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. ing.

  If the open sensor 122SG090 is OFF in 122SGSa019a, it is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start, a cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the process proceeds to 122SGSa021 (122SGSa019).

  In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104. Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (122SGSa022), and an interrupt is permitted (122SGSa023). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart illustrating the setting value confirmation processing executed by the CPU 103. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)). The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing 122SGSa033.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 ends the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034) and sends a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12. Then, the setting value confirmation processing is completed (122SGSa035).

  In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the state is the same as the case of starting by a normal hot start by terminating the setting confirmation state (ending the setting value confirmation processing). The command transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

  FIG. 9A is a flowchart illustrating the RAM clear processing executed by the CPU 103. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). If the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), the CPU 103 specifies the second address from the top in the RAM 102 and proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

  On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), the start address in the RAM 102 is designated and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa044).

  In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) “00H” at the designated address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), “00H” is set in the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 automatically sets the set value. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047). If the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). ; Y) ends the RAM clearing process.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area of the RAM 102 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, other addresses (F002, F003, etc.) include clear switch backup information that can specify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, as well as special figure storage and general figure storage. Game information including storage, values of various counters, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among other areas in which other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating a factory shipping state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started while the value indicating the factory shipping state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, The pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process may be prompted to be restarted by a display on the display device 5 or the like.

  In other words, the RAM clear processing in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment means that if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102 and there is backup data, the addresses (F001 to FXXX) except the address (F000) where the set value is stored are stored. ) Stores “00H” in the RAM 102 to clear data other than the set value, but when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or when there is no backup data, “00H” is stored in all the addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102. Is a process of clearing all the data including the set value by storing.

  In the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, the set value is stored in the first address F000 of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102. Is also good. When the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102 as described above, when executing the RAM clear processing shown in FIG. 9A, the address immediately before the last address of the RAM 102 is used as the address for clearing the data. , And "00H" may be stored sequentially from the address F000 to the address immediately before.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, an example is described in which data other than the set value in the RAM 102 is cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment) is cleared. It may be.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, the form in which the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. A process of storing or reading clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing it in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, any of an accumulator that is the center of operation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, and a general-purpose register). May be omitted, and the processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the clear switch backup information is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent other information (data) from being overwritten by the processing.

  FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart illustrating the setting change process executed by the CPU 103. In the setting change processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The set value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before the start of the set value change process (at the timing when the lock switch 122SG051 is determined to be ON in 122SGSa018). Then, the setting value stored in the address F000 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting switch 122SG052 has been operated (122SGSa054). When the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a set value that is one step more advantageous for the player than “1”, is set as the temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “2”, “3” which is one level more advantageous for the player than “2” is temporarily set. The value is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the RAM 102 at the address F001 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When the setting switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the processing of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processing of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 122SGSa054 to 122SGSa056 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 in the address F000. That is, the CPU 103 stores the set value stored at the address F001 (the provisional set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029) at the address F000, thereby changing the set value stored at the address F001 to the actual set value. (Change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, and ends the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

  In the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, the mode in which the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the setting change processing is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 within the game control main process (immediately after the end of the setting change process).

  In the characteristic section 122SG of this embodiment, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by turning off the lock switch 122SG051 (the provisional set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). Is stored in the address F000), but the present invention is not limited to this. The game ball can be placed in the starting winning opening, the clear switch can be operated, the lock switch 122SG051 can be pushed, and the like. By executing the operation described above, the lock switch 122SG051 may be turned off, so that a new set value may be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start or started in a setting change state, a cold start notification command or a set value change start is issued to the effect control board 12. Although the form in which the RAM clear processing is executed before the notification command is transmitted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be executed after transmitting the command or the setting value change start notification command.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and executes the RAM clearing process again after the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed (other than the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). May be cleared). By doing so, it is possible to prevent such a problem that a game is started while illegal data is stored in the RAM.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the common RAM clearing process (122SGSa017) is executed after the execution of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the cold start and the setting change state by the common RAM clearing process. Although a mode according to the state (a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, or a setting value change end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a setting change state, a command (a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, a setting value change Common RAM clear after sending the end notification command) to the effect control board 12 It may perform the physical.

  Next, a game control timer interrupt process in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-15, in the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (122SGS020), and then executes a process from a switch process (S21) to a command control process (S27). . As shown in FIGS. 9 to 16, in the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value from a power supply board (not shown). Is determined (122SGSa051). If there is no power-off signal input (122SGSa051; N), the process is terminated. If there is a power-off signal input (122SGSa051; Y), backup data including the set values stored in the RAM 102 is specified. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the process proceeds to a loop process in which none of the processes is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect control main process in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment. FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart illustrating the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit) register setting. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer corresponding to a command reception waiting period of a command transmitted from main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGS403), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404). When the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the command reception waiting timer expires.

  Then, when the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404; Y), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from the power cut, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player information is input in the player information input process described later). After accepting the input of the information, the information (information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and the process proceeds to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

  If no hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a cold notification command has been received (122SGS407). When the cold notification command is received (122SGS407; Y), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations and the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) , Information including the number of times of super reach, etc.) (122SGS408), and that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared, and that the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for notification (execution of RAM clear notification) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clear notification process, display of an image on the image display device 5, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. It is only necessary to be able to notify the clerk or the like of the amusement arcade that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the execution of the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

  If no cold start notification command has been received (122SGS407; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether a setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a notification that the setting value changing operation is being performed (a notification that the setting value is being changed) is issued. ) Is executed (122SGS411). Note that the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state generally means that the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open and the clerk of the amusement arcade changing the setting value uses the main board 11 Of the display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the camera. In other words, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of the game hall where the setting value is changed. It is considered from the display of the device 5 that it is impossible to determine whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state. Therefore, as the notification during the setting value change, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 to the clerk of the game hall where the setting value is changed. You just need to be informed.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change end notification command and the set value designation command have been received, that is, whether or not the set value of the set value has ended (122SGS412). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the received setting value designation command (the setting stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). The value is specified, and the specified setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as setting value information (a value of “1” to “3” corresponding to the setting value) (122SG413). Then, after executing the above-described processing of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processing of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 is repeatedly executed.

  In the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the RAM 122 is cleared after the execution of the notification of the change of the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the clearing of the RAM 122 is completed during the execution of the notification of the change of the set value, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the notification of the change of the set value. Notification may be performed.

  If the set value change start notifying command has not been received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value checking start notifying command has been received, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting check state. It is determined whether or not it has been started (122SGS414). If the setting value check start notification command has been received (122SGS414; Y), a setting value checking informing process for notifying that the setting is in the setting check state (the setting value can be checked from the display monitor 122SG029). Execute (122SGS415). In the notification process during the setting value confirmation, the display of an image on the image display device 5, the emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. It suffices if the setting confirmation state can be reported around the pachinko gaming machine 1. If no effect of the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of 122SGS405, and issues a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, It waits until any of the value confirmation start notification commands is received (repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, and 122SGS414).

  As described above, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-18, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start or the setting change state, the player information ( While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. after receiving the input of the player information from the RAM 122, the effect information (the number of fluctuations since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, The super-reach count, etc.) and set value information (any numerical value of “1” to “3” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is set to the setting value information already stored in the RAM 122. Overwrite (update storage).

  That is, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting confirmation state, or a setting change state.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. Illustrates a form in which the player information and the production information are not cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, The player information and the production information may be cleared.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, in 122SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received, and displays the image. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the received command is started in the device 5. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If not set, the display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 5 as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as an initial design. When the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "from the left as an initial symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. The display of the decorative symbol is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In the characteristic section 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of the decorative symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example," 1 ") that is advantageous for the player is When set, the decorative pattern is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial pattern at a higher rate than when the setting value (for example, "3") disadvantageous to the player is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that a setting value that is advantageous for the player is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

  In the characteristic section 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of the decorative symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example," 1 ") that is advantageous for the player is The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different between the case where the setting is set and the case where the setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set. Further, when the setting value (for example, “1”) that is advantageous to the player is set, and when the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set, the speakers 8L and 8R output The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be varied.

  Then, returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” to the look-ahead restriction counter in order to regulate the execution of the prefetch notice effect in the first four fluctuations (122SGS418). Thereafter, effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes a startup notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (122SGS421). In the startup notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interrupt is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If this is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined which of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command has been received. A start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and a start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start-up notification process timer is started, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start-up notification process timer and the start-up notification process table by executing the start-up notification process in the next and subsequent interrupts. The notification may be performed.

  In the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. The mode of the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on whether there is any.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. When the set value is not set, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. The timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds and the timing at which the output sound A starts for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  Further, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and outputs the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  In other words, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or a setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the gaming effect lamp 9 to emit light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R to emit light for 30 seconds. Output of the output sound A, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Performing the output of B includes both.

  In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives the set value change end notification command when it is activated, that is, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming effect Light emission of the lamp 9 for 40 seconds, output of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and display of a message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed). Execute It should be noted that the emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the setting value change end notification command is received. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. Differently, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  In other words, the special control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the gaming effect lamp 9 to emit light for 40 seconds and output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds. C, and display of a message image on the image display device 5 for 40 seconds.

  As described above, the timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts to emit light, the timing at which sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R starts, and the timing at which image display is started on the image display device 5 are the same. Regarding the notification mode when the machine 1 is started, the notification period when the hot start notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start) is 60 seconds, and the cold start notification command is issued. When the notification is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the set value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up in a setting changed state). The period is 40 seconds.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example is described in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer such as a management computer of a game arcade or a counter of each unit, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start-up notification at this time, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, the cold start, the setting change state, and the setting confirmation state, a device for executing the start notification is partially common. Although a certain form (in which light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. A device that performs start notification differs depending on whether the device is started in a start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. (For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a signal is output from the above-described external output terminal to the management device. It may be, or the like) that.

  Further, the notification mode of each device that executes the start notification may be made different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. In this case, only some of the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may emit light.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers), and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound output from all speakers 8L and 8R may be performed. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as “setting is being changed”, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 have been cleared, such as “RAM cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Further, in the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, a terminal for outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the set value is completed (the time until the change of the set value is received or the set value change command is received) During the period, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change to the management device, and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification.

  When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be made different according to each notification.

  As described above, in the start-up notification process, a form in which the start-up notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. In addition, the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which the start notification is performed even when any of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, and a set value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this. Among the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command, the pachinko gaming machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

  In addition, in feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, as an initializing effect in the present invention, a start notification in a different mode is executed according to a command received when pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or pachinko gaming machine 1 Is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received when the is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of the start notification and the combination of the decorative symbols may be all different according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only a part of them may be the same.

  Further, in feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, when pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, started by a cold start, started by a setting change state, or started by a setting confirmation state, Also, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or started in a setting confirmation state, the start notification May not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, next, effect control CPU 120 executes power-off detection processing (122 SGS422). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIGS. 9 to 22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal from a power supply board (not shown) indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (122SGS431). If there is no input of the power-off signal (122SGS431; N), the processing is terminated, and if there is an input of the power-off signal (122SGS431; Y), the setting value information and the player information stored in the RAM 122 are deleted. The backup data including the backup data is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the processing shifts to a loop processing in which none of the processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis processing, effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 9C) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs an effect control process (122SGS424). In the effect control process process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process (122SGS425) for updating the count value of a counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number, a player information input process for accepting input of player information (122SGS426), A player information output process of outputting player information (122SGS427) and an effect information totaling process of totaling effect information (122SGS428) are executed. Then, the process proceeds to S52.

  In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player to change the password (the password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and can receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of times of change, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, and the like as player information stored each time a variable display, a big hit game, or a super reach is executed.

  In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and generates the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player can read the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a portable terminal such as a smartphone and transmit the player information totalized in the current game to an external server, thereby obtaining a pachinko gaming machine. 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, and the like stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time a variable display, a big hit game, or a super reach is executed. I do.

  Next, a description will be given of the effect control process processing in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441). If the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441; Y), after executing the look-ahead notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag is performed. Perform the above processing.

  When the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is any one of “1” to “4” (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122SGS442). ). If the value of the effect control process flag is “0” or any of “2” to “7” (122SGS442; N), any one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag When the processing is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122SGS442; Y), the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is decremented by 1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) are performed according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7). By executing the processes of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after startup, the execution of the prefetch notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby displaying the variable display four times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 determines whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated, based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated. 5), the execution of the prefetch notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

  In addition, in feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, regardless of whether pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start or in a setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related to the progress of the game based on the fact that the game has become possible. As a setting, an example in which the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is regulated over four variable displays is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start. Regardless of whether the game has been started in the changed state, based on the fact that the game has become possible, the settings relating to the progress of the game are set according to the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC. The setting of the effect and the like may be set to the state at the time of factory shipment.

  As described above, in pachinko gaming machine 1 in feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8H, effect control CPU 120 determines whether super reach A or super reach B is the first suggestion effect. The reach effect and the reach effect of super reach C or super reach D as the second suggestion effect can be executed, and when the reach effect of super reach C or super reach D is executed, the super reach C And the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production of Super Reach C and Super Reach D is notified from the start of the reach production of Super Reach D, and the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach production can be executed. Can be improved.

Further, the present embodiment also includes the following invention 122SG. That is, as the conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started. ), A command (control information) output from the main board to the effect control board (effect control means) in order to restore the gaming machine based on the memory in which the main board (game control board) is backed up. A command output from the main board to the effect control board to clear the backed-up memory regardless of the memory where the main board is backed up, and a state in which the set value of the gaming machine can be changed If the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, when the game machine is powered on and activated, the effect control board is Making it impossible perform appropriate processing according to the movement state. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of Means 1 of Invention 122SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
A backup storage unit (for example, the RAM 102) capable of holding stored contents for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 clears the RAM shown in FIGS. 9-17) that can control the effect based on the control information (for example, the effect control command shown in FIG. 9-3) output from the game control means. A notification process, a notification process during a setting value change, a notification process during a setting value check, etc.),
With
After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the game control means sets a startup state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and restores the first startup based on the storage content stored in the backup storage means. State (for example, hot start), a second activation state (for example, cold start) for erasing and restoring the stored contents regardless of the stored contents stored in the backup storage means, and setting by the setting means is possible. , And outputs different control information corresponding to the activated state to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-14). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the CPU 103 transmits a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and the pachinko gaming machine When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start mode, the CPU 103 transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12. The part that sends the setting value change start notification command)
According to this feature, it is possible for the effect control means to execute an appropriate process according to the activation state of the game control means when the power supply is started. .

Furthermore, as means 2 of invention 122SG,
An effect control storage means (eg, a RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
The information to be erased among the information stored in the effect control storage means differs between the case where the activation state corresponding to the control information is the second activation state and the case where the third activation state. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting confirmation state, or a setting change state.
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform appropriate erasure according to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 3 of invention 122SG,
The game control means can output control information (for example, a set value change end notification command) for designating the end of the third activation state,
The effect control means performs special control according to the end of the third activation state based on the output of the control information designating the termination of the third activation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20). As described above, based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit light for 40 seconds and output the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds in the startup notification process. Then, the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed).
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the set value can be set has ended by the special control.

Further, as means 4 of invention 122SG,
When the control information corresponding to the first activation state or the second activation state is output, the effect control means performs specific control according to the output (for example, as shown in FIGS. Based on the reception of the start notification command and the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process.
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize by a specific control that a starting state in which a set value cannot be set is provided.

Further, as means 5 of the invention 122SG,
The effect control means performs different control depending on the activation state corresponding to the control information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, the effect control CPU 120 In the start-up notification process, the CPU 120 for effect control performs based on the part that emits the light of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output of the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds and receives the cold start notification command. In the start-up notification process, a portion for executing the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputting the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect of controlling the production control based on the reception of the set value change end notification command. The CPU 120 emits light for 40 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process. A part for outputting the output sound C and executing a message image for 40 seconds in the image display device 5. Also, as shown in Fig. 9-19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command and the cold start notification command, The decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" as the initial symbol, and the decorative symbol is set to "4" or "5" as the initial symbol based on the reception of the set value change end notification command. , "6")
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activation state is in effect.

Further, as means 6 of the invention 122SG,
When the set value is changed in the third activation state, the game control unit deletes the backup information stored in the backup storage unit except for the specific information (for example, the modified example 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-23, the RAM clear processing is executed based on the change of the set value, and the data after the address F001 except the data of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is cleared. part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate erasure of backup information according to a change in a set value.

Further, as means 7 of the invention 122SG,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
The timing at which at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased differs between the first activation state and the second activation state (for example, as shown in a modified example 122SG-4, a pachinko machine). When the gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the RAM clear processing is executed at a timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the setting change state, , RAM clear processing is executed at the timing after the setting value change start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, erasing of game information can be executed at an appropriate timing according to an activation state.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 123SG. That is, as the conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started. And when the main board is backed up regardless of the backed up storage (general start-up state) and when the set value of the gaming machine can be changed (set start-up state) If the notification mode is the same, it is difficult to identify whether the gaming machine is in the general activation state or the setting activation state, and it is difficult to find an illegal setting change or the like of the gaming machine. Was. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of Means 1 of Invention 123SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
Backup storage means (for example, the RAM 102 or the RAM 122) capable of holding the stored contents for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Start-up notifying means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the start-up notifying process shown in FIGS. 9-17) capable of notifying the start-up state of the game control means when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
With
The game control means includes, as the start state, a general start state (for example, a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start) in which the storage contents stored in the backup storage means are cleared and started, and A setting activation state (for example, a setting change state) for validating the setting,
The start notification unit performs the notification in a different manner in the general start state and the set start state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the light emission of the game effect lamp and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed. A part for displaying a message image on the display device 5)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily specify whether the activation state is the general activation state or the setting activation state, and thus it is possible to easily detect an illegality due to the setting. .

Further, as means 2 of invention 123SG,
The start notification unit can execute various notifications according to the priority,
The priority of the notification of the setting activation state is higher than the priority of the notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in Modification 122SG-5, during the execution of the high priority setting value change notification, A part to prevent low priority RAM clear notification from being executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the notification of the setting activation state is given priority, so that it is possible to prevent an improper setting from being discovered.

Further, as means 3 of invention 123SG,
The start notifying unit notifies the set start state and the general start state in different notification periods (for example, the notification period when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start is 60 seconds, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (The part where the notification period is 40 seconds when is started in the setting change state)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate notification in a period according to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 4 of invention 123SG,
The activation notifying means,
A first notification unit (for example, the image display device 5), and a second notification unit (for example, the game effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R) different from the first notification unit,
The setting notification state is notified by the first notification means (for example, a portion displaying a message image on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 9 to 20),
The general start-up state is notified by the second notification unit (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, a part that emits light from the game effect lamp 9 and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, since the start-up notification is executed by different notification means, it is easy to recognize which start-up state is in effect.

Further, as means 5 of invention 123SG,
The game control means includes a game control by a common setting as a setting related to a game progress in a game possible state after the setting start state and a game possible state after the general start state. A game in which the CPU 103 does not execute the start winning determination process after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, and thereby, it is possible to execute the prefetch notice effect up to four times of fluctuation display). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience, such as the fact that the setting change has been recognized by executing the game control with different settings.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 124SG. That is, conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-137351. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-137351, if the game information is unintentionally erased due to a change in the set value, the gaming machine or the game machine in which the gaming machine is installed may be lost. There is a risk of giving a disadvantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the invention 124SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
Notification means capable of notifying in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage means is to be deleted (for example, a part where effect control CPU 120 executes a set value change confirmation notification process in Modification 122SG-1). When,
With
The game control means deletes at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means when a new set value is set by the setting means (for example, when the CPU 103 has the modification 122SG-1). A part for executing the RAM clear processing shown in FIG.
The predetermined operation includes a setting change start operation (for example, an operation of turning on a clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, an operation of turning on a setting changeover switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, turning off a lock switch 122SG051). Operation) and
The setting unit can perform the setting change operation by performing the setting change start operation (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 9-23 as the modified example 122SG-1, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON. After the determination (122SGSa054a; Y), the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be executed), and the setting change completion operation is performed after the enabled setting change operation. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modified example 122SG-1), the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N), and then executes the process of 122SGSa058. ),
The notification unit executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-24 as a modification 122SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first setting value change start). (A part that executes a setting value change confirmation notification process based on the determination that the notification command has been received (122SGS410; Y))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gaming information from being unintentionally erased due to a change in the set value.

Further, as means 2 of invention 124SG,
The game control means, after the setting change start operation, if the setting change completion operation is performed without performing the setting change operation, the game information stored in the game information storage means, If the lock switch 122SG051 is not turned off after the CPU 103 determines that the setting changeover switch has not been operated (122SGSa054d; N), as shown in FIG. If it is determined, based on the fact that the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), the set value change process is terminated without executing the RAM clear process (122SGSa060). Part)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged by erasing the game information even though the set value is not changed. be able to.

Further, as means 3 of invention 124SG,
The notifying unit can notify that the game information is not deleted by the game control unit when the predetermined operation is completed without performing the setting change completion operation (for example, as a modified example 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-25, a portion where message image 122 SG005M1 is displayed on image display device 5 when effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change confirmation notifying process.
According to this feature, the gaming machine is characterized in that the operator can recognize an operation method for preventing the gaming information from being erased, so that the gaming information is not intended. Erase can be further prevented.

Further, as means 4 of the invention 124SG,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the erasure condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined confirmation operation is performed, the game control means stores the game information stored in the game information storage means. After erasing at least a part of the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON in the game control main process (122SGSa003; Y), and then executes the RAM clear process (122SGSa017). Part),
The notification unit also performs the notification even when the erasing condition is satisfied (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 9-26 as a modified example 122SG-2, a message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5). part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent game information from being erased unintentionally.

Further, as means 5 of invention 124SG,
Effect control means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling effects based on control information output from the game control means;
Effect control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
Selecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to execute erasure in the effect control storage means;
With
When the erasure condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and when it is selected by the selection means not to execute the erasure in the effect control storage means, the game information storage is performed. At least a portion of the game information stored in the means is erased (for example, as shown in a modified example 122SG-3, only the RAM 102 is cleared), and the erasing condition is set when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Is satisfied, and when it is selected by the selection means to execute the erasure in the effect control storage means, at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased. And at least part of the information stored in the effect control storage means is erased (for example, as shown in Modification 122SG-3, RAM1 Part to clear both the 2 and RAM122)
According to this feature, when the erasure condition is satisfied, whether or not to erase the effect control storage means together with the erasure in the game information storage means is described. Can be selected.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 122SG according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and there may be changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention. This is also included in the present invention.

  For example, in the characteristic part 122SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the clear switch is ON at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, after executing the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017), the lock switch is executed. When the 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y), the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed, and an example in which a new set value can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, it is first determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, the setting change process is performed. RAM clear processing is executed based on the setting of a new set value in pachinko gaming machine It may be.

  As described above, when the RAM clearing process is executed based on the setting of the new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as the modified example 122SG-1, In the setting change processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a first setting value change times notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started executing the setting change processing to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). Next, the setting value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a). If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), the CPU 103 further determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054a; N). 122SGSa054b). If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processes of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is turned ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF. If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the setting change process ends (122SGS061).

  When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second setting value change start notification command indicating that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d).

  If the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a set value that is one step more advantageous for the player than “1”, is set as the temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “2”, “3” which is one level more advantageous for the player than “2” is temporarily set. The value is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the RAM 102 at the address F001 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When the setting switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the processing of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processing of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 to store a new temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  If the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). If the setting value (temporary setting value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, if the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052, a setting value change end notification command is produced. The setting is transmitted to the control board 12 and the setting change process ends (122SGS061).

  On the other hand, when the set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the set value stored in the address F001 are used. (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether the same setting value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). If the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been changed, a set value change end notification command is issued. The settings are transmitted to the substrate 12 and the setting change process is terminated (122SGS061).

  When different setting values are stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The set value is stored at the address F000, that is, the set value stored at the address F001 is stored as the main set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa058).

  Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value (the newly set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1) stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. The processing is executed (122SGSa060). Note that the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) executes the same processing as the RAM clear processing described with reference to FIG. 9-13, and excludes the set values stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 (stored after the address F001). Clear data). After the execution of the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060), a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the setting change processing is ended (122SGS061).

  FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the effect control main process in Modification Example 122SG-1. In the effect control main process in the modification 122SG-1, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the cold start notification command has not been received (122SGS407; N), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a start notification command has been received (122SGS410a). If the first setting value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17). If the first setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410a; Y), By executing a setting value change confirmation notification process (122SGS410b), the game information or the like stored in the RAM 102 is cleared by changing the setting value on the image display device 5, or the lock is set when the setting value is not changed. An instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 9-25 (A)).

  Then, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410c). If the second set value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command has been received (122SGS410d). If the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS410d; N), the processing of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d is repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the first setting value change start notification command or the setting value change end notification command is received. If the setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17).

  Further, when the second setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value changing notification process for notifying that the setting value changing operation is being performed. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS411a). If the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS411a; N), the processes of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. When the setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether or not the setting value designation command is received (122SGS411b). If the setting value designation command has not been received (122SGS411b; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17). If the setting value designation command has been received (122SGS411b; Y), the process proceeds from the received setting value designation command. A set value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified set value is set value information (“1” to “3” corresponding to the set value). Is updated and stored in the RAM 122 (122SG413). Then, the process proceeds to 122SGS408 (see FIG. 9-17).

  As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process. When the device 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (A), the game display information 5 and the like are cleared in the image display device 5 by changing the set value, and the set value is changed. If not, an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1.

  When the clerk of the game arcade or the like turns off the lock switch 122SG051 while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 as described above, as shown in FIG. Is not changed and the RAM 102 is not cleared, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3". On the other hand, when the clerk of the game arcade turns on the clear switch again while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is in a setting change state, and the display of the image on the image display device 5, the emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like inform that the setting value is being changed.

  In the setting change state, a case where the store clerk of the game hall or the like turns off the lock switch 122SG051 without setting a new set value, or a case where the store clerk of the game hall or the like sets the same value as the original set value as a new set value When the set value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 9D, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared. Instead, a decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of “1”, “2”, and “3”. Further, in the setting change state, when a store clerk at the game hall or the like sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051, as shown in FIG. Is changed, the RAM 102 is cleared, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In the modified example 122SG-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 activates the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned ON, thereby changing the set value on the image display device 5. The example in which the game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The present invention is not limited to this, and as illustrated in FIG. 9-26 as a modified example 122SG-2, image display is performed by activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 with a clearing switch turned on by a store clerk or the like at a game arcade. By starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a cold start in the device 5, the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared. That and that, if it does not start a pachinko game machine 1 at cold start an instruction to reboot the pachinko gaming machine 1, may be displayed as a message image 122SG005M2.

  In this way, for example, when a clerk at a game arcade turns on the clear switch by mistake when trying to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a hot start, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up at a cold start. It is possible to prevent the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being cleared unintentionally.

  In the modified examples 122SG-1 and 122SG-2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state or started in a cold start, the message image 122SG005M1 or the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed to confirm whether or not to clear the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 102 is cleared by displaying a message image on the image display device 5. Whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state and / or started by cold start may be confirmed.

  In the modified example 122SG-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 activates the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned ON, thereby changing the set value on the image display device 5. The example in which the game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 9-27 as a modified example 122SG-3, the RAM 102 is cleared based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start and that the set value has been changed. If the setting value is changed on the image display device 5 or the RAM 102 is cleared, In addition to displaying a message image 122SG005M3 including an option of clearing the RAM 122 in response to a change in the fixed value or clearing of the RAM 102, the RAM 122 is cleared by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. The selection of whether or not may be accepted.

  When clearing of the RAM 122 is selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 executes the RAM clearing process to clear other information except the set value information in the RAM 122 (results). If the user does not select to clear the RAM 122 by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the RAM 122 is not cleared (resulting in clearing only the RAM 102).

  Also, in the characteristic part 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the same timing (the cold start notification command or the setting Although the form in which the RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before the value change start notification command is transmitted) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the modified example 122SG-4, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is started by a cold start, the RAM clear processing is executed at a timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the effect control is performed. Timing after transmitting the setting value change start notification command to the board 12 (more specifically, When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, for example, by executing a RAM clearing process after transmitting the set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, that is, after the end of the set value change. The timing of clearing the RAM 102 may be different between the case where the RAM 102 is started in the setting change state.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a setting change state. Although the form in which the RAM clear notification process is executed to notify the fact (perform the RAM clear notification) is described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 122SG-5, a pachinko game When the machine 1 is started in the setting change state to notify that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed (to execute the notification during the change of the set value), each notification such as not executing the RAM clear notification is performed. , And when a high-priority notification (for example, notification of a change in the set value) is being performed, a low-priority notification (for example, a RAM clear notification) is issued. It may not be line.

  In the case where a priority is provided for each notification in this way, a low-priority notification may be executed after a high-priority notification is executed. In this case, the low-priority notification is executed in a shorter time period than when the high-priority notification is not executed, so that the notification execution period is prevented from becoming long. You may.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the setting for the movable body 32 is not performed at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. At the time, the confirmation operation of whether or not the movable body 32 operates normally may be executed in parallel with the above-described notification of the RAM clear, the notification of the change of the set value, the notification of the confirmation of the set value, and the various types of start notification. . When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a hot start or a cold start, a start-up notification for 60 seconds is executed, so that the operation of checking the movable body 32 can be executed during the start-up notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the set value is changed in addition to the start notification for 40 seconds. Therefore, the movable body 32 is changed during the change of these set values and during the start notification for 40 seconds. Can be performed.

  The operation of checking the movable body 32 may be performed from the time the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, regardless of the activation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, The effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) may execute the set value change start notification command, the set value change end notification command, the set value confirmation start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the like from the time when the effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) receives the command. Further, in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the check operation of the movable body 32 from the point of receiving the set value change start notification command, that is, executes the check operation of the movable body 32 during the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 In such a case, even if an error occurs in the confirmation operation, the execution of the notification during the change of the set value is prioritized, and the error notification of the confirmation operation may not be executed.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG of the embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that the new setting value is directly reflected in the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko gaming). The new setting value may be reflected in the game by activating the machine 1 by a hot start). When the new setting value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1 as described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the movable body 32 is checked. After the movable body 32 is slightly moved from the origin position to the production position, a confirmation operation that can be performed in a relatively short period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again, is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is restarted, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, a confirmation that requires a relatively long period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position and then moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again. The operation may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the period required for the operation of checking the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the embodiment, the set value stored in the address F000 is disclosed as the specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, Specific information that is not performed may include RTC settings, error history, and the like.

  Furthermore, in the characteristic part 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the set value as the specific information that is not cleared in the RAM 102, the temporary set value, the game information, and the like as the information that is cleared is stored is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores specific information that is not cleared such as set values, and the other RAM stores provisional set values and game information. Information to be cleared, such as information, may be stored. By doing so, the RAM (temporary set values, game information, and the like) on the other side is stored depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. (RAM) is cleared. Further, an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared may be provided in the RAM 102.

  In the case where two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100 as described above, a RAM (Static Random Access Memory) in which a RAM for storing specific information such as set values which are not cleared is connected to a backup battery is connected. On the other hand, by setting the RAM in which the temporary setting values and the game information are stored as FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory), data having higher importance than other data such as setting values can be surely cleared. Alternatively, the information may be stored without being stored.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be mounted on. By doing so, there is no need to attach a new clear switch to the existing power supply board, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the characteristic portion 122SG, the mode in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A display monitor 122SG029 may be provided at a position near the setting changeover switch 122SG052 in 11 to make it easy to execute a setting value changing operation.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. When it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the machine 1, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

  Further, in the characteristic part 122SG in the above-described embodiment, an example is described in which the display monitor 122SG029 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 are provided on the main board 11 so that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed using a monitor (7-segment monitor) mounted on the payout control board, a reset button, or the like.

  Also, in the characteristic section 122SG in the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the same as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. Since the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) is executed, both the set value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the setting value 1 is set to the most advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting value 3 is set to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (the setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous for the game place). The setting value 3 is set to be the most advantageous setting value for the game hall), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value may be set as the set value 3 and the set value most advantageous to the player.

  In particular, in the characteristic part 122SG, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), “00H” is set to the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is a state in which the set value 1 is automatically set, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes the most advantageous state for the player. For this reason, some players may cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to improperly set the value 1 to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by causing the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clearing process (see FIG. 9A) after causing an abnormality in the RAM 102 or the like. It is assumed to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the setting value 1 to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute the game based on the fact that the CPU 103 executes the RAM clearing process when the RAM 102 has an abnormality or the like. It is possible to prevent a situation that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the above embodiment, the special control and the specific control executed by the effect control CPU 120 perform the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sound and the output period output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image. Although the form in which the image is displayed on the display device 5 or the like is different (the control relating to the notification at the time of starting is different) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the control related to the above-described notification at the time of startup, an initial symbol (see FIGS. 9-19), a background image, and a character displayed on the image display device 5 after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where a game can be played. (For example, the production mode and the production state after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play) are different, and the movable body 32 is checked. Whether to execute the work, aspects and execution period of the confirmation operations may include control surrounding confirmation operation, such as different. In other words, the special control and the specific control in the present invention may be any control as long as at least a part of the control target of the effect control CPU 120, the control mode of the effect control CPU 120, the control period of the effect control CPU 120, and the like is different. .

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value, Can be started, and a variable display result is derived on an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each of which is identifiable, thereby ending one game and displaying the variable display derived on the image display device. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the result.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the embodiment, a message such as “setting is being changed” is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the effect control CPU 120 determining that the setting value change start notification command has been received. Thus, the effect of the setting change is notified by the effect control CPU 120, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these notifications are transmitted to the main board 11 (CPU 103). May be executed. In this case, a signal capable of specifying that the main board 11 is changing the setting is sent to an external management device such as a computer for managing a hole, for example, as information. Notification may be made to an external device by outputting from the terminal board, and further, the main board 11 (CPU 103) is connected to the main board 11. By controlling the display and lighting conditions such as indicators and lamps, it may be recognizable informed externally that is being set changes. For example, all the indicators and lamps connected to the main board 11 may be turned on. In order to distinguish between the setting change and the other state (playable state), it is preferable that a display, a lamp, and the like connected to the main board 11 emit light in a mode different from that during a normal game. .

  The main board 11 (CPU 103) outputs a signal to the outside to notify not only when the setting is being changed but also when the setting is being checked, or when the main board 11 is connected to the main board 11. By controlling the display and the lighting state of the display and the lamp, etc., which are present, the fact that the setting is being confirmed may be notified so as to be recognizable from the outside.

  As described above, the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes the notification, so that, for example, even for a model without the image display device 5, for example, a model such as a drum machine, the setting is being changed or the setting confirmation is performed. Inside can be recognized from outside.

  When the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes the notification, a dedicated lamp or LED for notifying that the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked may be provided. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B connected to the main board 11 (CPU 103), and the normal symbol display are provided for the purpose of preventing an increase in cost due to the provision of these dedicated lamps and LEDs. The display mode of the device 20 is changed to a special display mode that is not displayed during a normal game (during variable display, during non-variable display (standby), during a jackpot game, and the like), for example, a blinking display and a special display pattern (special display). The notification may be made by lighting the display in FIG.

  In addition, when a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like is provided, in order to prevent the player or the like from easily recognizing that the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked, for example, the lamp or the LED is used. An LED or the like may be provided inside the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, or the ordinary symbol display device 20.

  In the case of notifying both that the setting is being changed and that the setting is being checked, these states are notified (notified to the outside) in one notification mode (the same output signal). Alternatively, each of these states may be notified (notified to the outside) in an individual notification mode (different output signal) so that the state of each state can be specified from the outside.

  If the main board 11 (CPU 103) can notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed by lighting or blinking of a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like, the display control unit in the effect control board 12 The setting is being changed immediately by lighting / flashing of a dedicated lamp or LED without waiting for the rise of 123 (without waiting for the display of a message such as “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5). It can be notified that there is something or that the setting is being confirmed.

(Explanation of the feature part 138SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment will be described. Note that a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment is the same as the above-described characteristic portion 31AK, and thus a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this feature portion 128SG, the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 138SG according to the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 10-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10A, the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), a result of determining whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result ), And different EXT data are set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the result of the preliminary determination that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable variable big hit A" and the result of the big hit type determination. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result indicating that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable variable big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result and a large hit type determination result indicating that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable variable big hit". The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening that notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening or the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10B, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random pattern value for determining a variation pattern. Numerical data representing each of the random number value MR3 and the random number value MR4 for determining the general-purpose display result is controlled to be countable. It should be noted that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 updates various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), so that one of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is updated. Numerical data indicating a unit may be counted.

  The random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination determines whether or not to control the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in the special figure game to a "big hit" or "small hit" to a big hit game state or a small hit game state. Random value used for this purpose, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “65536”. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type to be one of “probable variable jackpot A”, “probable variable jackpot B”, and “non-probable variable” when the variation display result is “big hit”. It is a random value, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example.

  The random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is a random value used to determine a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, “1” to “1”. 997 ”.

  The random number value MR4 for determining the general figure display result is used to determine whether the variation display result in the general figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is “per-normal figure hit” or “normal figure loss”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”.

  FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment. In the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” respectively. In addition, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to a case where the variation display result is “big hit”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss fluctuation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “loss”. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit (special hit) fluctuation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. , A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment is the super reach variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β. It is set shorter than. Also, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach reach such as the super reach α and the super reach β in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment is performed, the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed. The fluctuation pattern is set to have a longer special figure fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is performed.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, as described above, since the fluctuation display result is set to “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation degree is set to be high. In the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit.

  In the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into the types of the fluctuation patterns, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, and a super-reach type. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after the determination beforehand, only the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number for pattern type determination, the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined. It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to a game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a plurality of variation patterns as shown in FIG. Table data and the like constituting a variation pattern table for storing types are stored.

  FIG. 10D illustrates a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A separate display result determination table may be used for the second special map and the second special map.

  The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display apparatus 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display apparatus 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined whether or not to control the fluctuation display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state or to control the variable display result to the "small hit" as the small hitting gaming state. Is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, the special figure display result depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low-precision state), or a probable change state (high-accuracy state). Numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judgment are assigned to the special map display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "losing".

  In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is based on whether the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" to control the big hit game state or not. The determination data is assigned to the result of determining whether or not to control the small hitting game state with the result being “small hit”. In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is in the probable change state (high-precision state), more determination values than in the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) are “big hits”. Assigned to special map display results. Thus, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state Then, compared to the determined probability (about 1/300 in the present embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be the big hit and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (about 1/30 in the present embodiment). ). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state (high-precision state), the probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state is determined. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so as to be higher.

  In the display result determination table, the same number of determination values is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit” regardless of whether the game state is the probable change state. As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” and controlled to the small hitting game state regardless of whether the state is the probability change state (the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment). 1/200) is constant.

  FIG. 10-5 shows a configuration example of the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when it is determined to control the special map display result to "big hit" to the big hit gaming state, based on the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, one of a plurality of big hit types Is a table that is referred to in order to determine. In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which the variable display (fluctuation) is performed in the special figure game is the first special figure (a special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special figure (the second special figure). The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is “non-probable change”, “probable change big hit A”, “probable change big hit B” Are assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots.

  Here, the big hit type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 10-5 (B). In the present embodiment, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed as the big hit type after the end of the big hit game state. A large-variable big hit A or a large-variable big hit B that shifts to the high-precision high-basis state, and a non-variable large-big hit that shifts to the low-probability high-basis state by executing only the time-saving control after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  As described above, in the jackpot game state of “probably variable jackpot A” and the jackpot game state of “non-probable jackpot A”, 16 rounds of changing the special variable prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player (so-called “big hit jackpot A”). 16 rounds), a jackpot that is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the big hit game state with the “probable change big hit B”, as described above, five rounds (so-called five rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. It is a big hit. Therefore, there is a case where “probably variable big hit A” is referred to as 16 round (16R) probability big hit and “probably variable big hit B” is called 5 round (5R) certain variable big hit.

  The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the big-hit jackpot A or the big-hit jackpot B have ended are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big-hit game state ends. Therefore, if the jackpot that has recurred is the jackpot jackpot A or the jackpot jackpot B, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It is a so-called connected state that occurs continuously.

  On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by the “non-probable variable jackpot” is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before is executed.

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), “probable variable jackpot A” and “probable variable jackpot B” depend on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Are different in the assignment of judgment values to the jackpot types. That is, when the fluctuation special map is the first special map, a determination value in a predetermined range (a value in a range of “81” to “100”) is assigned to the big hit type of “probable big hit B” with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of “probable change big hit B”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. And a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “probable jackpot B” with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special map game using the second special map, it is not determined that the big hit type is “probably variable big hit B” and the state is controlled to the short open big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a gaming state in which game balls easily enter the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of a short-term open big hit state in which few prize balls are obtained, thereby reducing the gaming interest. It can be prevented.

  In addition, in the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the big hit type of “non-probable change” is based on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The probability of a non-probabilistic big hit and the probability of a probable big hit are the same regardless of whether the variation special map is the first special map or the second special map. It has been.

  Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination value to “probably variable big hit B” differs depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Is also different depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probable variable big hit A" having a large number of rounds, the variation special figure is the second special figure. Is set to be more easily determined in the case of.

  It should be noted that, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, a judgment value in a predetermined range different from the case where the fluctuation special map is the first special map is assigned to the big hit type of “probable variable big hit B”. You may. For example, when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, a smaller determination value than when the fluctuation special map is the first special map may be assigned to the big hit type of “probable variable big hit B”. Alternatively, the big hit type may be determined with reference to the common table data regardless of whether the fluctuation special map is the first special map or the second special map.

  The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  More specifically, the variation pattern determination table includes a large hit variation pattern determination table that is used when it is determined in advance that the special map display result should be “big hit”, and a special map display result that is “small hit”. And a variation pattern determination table for small hits used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the special figure display result is "losing". , Are prepared in advance.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value. In the present embodiment, when these determination values are such that the type of the big hit is “probably variable big hit A” or “probably variable big hit B”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of big hit is “non-probable big hit”. In the case of, the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it does not become “probable variable hit A” or “probable variable hit B”. The player's sense of expectation can be increased.

  In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, all random numbers within the range of the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are determined for the variation pattern (PC1-1) of the special hit (small hit). Assigned as a value.

  The variation pattern determination table for loss is used when the number of retained storages is one or less, and the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used when the total number of retained storages is two to four. Loss variation pattern determination table B, Loss variation pattern determination table C used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8, and a case where the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed. And a loss variation pattern determination table D to be used for the following are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned to the variation pattern of β loss (PA2-3) as the determination value. Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach, which correspond to the total number of stored storages of 2 to 4, respectively. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing. Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach that correspond to the total number of stored memories of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing. Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time reduction control. PA2-2) and a variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation pattern (PA1) The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of the variation pattern (PA1-3). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, and the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of four. Sometimes, when the start winning is made, it becomes difficult to cause useless starting winning in which the holding memory is not made, and when the number of the holding memories is reduced, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss without shortening the fluctuation time is long. By determining PA1-1), it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the variable display time is lengthened.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  The effect control flag setting section includes a plurality of types of effect operation states such as a display state of an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated in response to an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The effect control buffer setting unit stores data constituting a start winning reception command buffer. In the start prize receiving command buffer, a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved special first reserved storages is stored. Area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during the variable display. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer, storage areas (buffer numbers “2-1” to “2-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of reserved special second reserved storages are stored. ) And a storage area (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during the variable display. When there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category designation The four commands, ie, the command and the notification command of the number of reserved storages (the first notification command of the number of reserved storages or the second notification command of the number of reserved storages), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer include the start opening winning designating command, the symbol designating command, the variable category specifying command, and the holding. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage separately in association with the storage number notification command is secured.

  The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest hold storage (buffer number “1-1” or buffer number “2-1”) is started. The buffer number “1-0” or the buffer number “2-0” for storing the contents of the hold storage satisfying the start condition is displayed in the variable display. Is cleared in the waiting process per special figure executed when ending.

  FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process. In the variable display start setting process, first, effect CPU 120 determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (138SGS351). If the first variation start command reception flag is set (138SGS351; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start prize reception command buffer 138SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are additionally stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (138SGS352). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift.

  If the first change start command reception flag has not been set (138SGS351; N), it is determined whether the second change start command reception flag has been set (138SGS353). If the second change start command reception flag is not set (138SGS353; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second change start command reception flag is set (138SGS353; Y), start. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers “2-0” to “2-4” of the second special figure holding storage in the prize receiving command buffer 138SG194A are higher by one buffer number at a time. (138SGS354). Note that the contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because there is no destination to shift, so that the contents cannot be shifted.

  After the execution of 138SGS352 or 138SGS354, the effect control CPU 120 reads a variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (138SGS355).

  Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command) (138SGS356). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. I do.

  In the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability change jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets the stop symbol as 3 symbols. The combination (decorative symbol) of the decorative symbol whose symbol is "7" is determined. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, as the stop symbol, a plurality of combinations of odd-number symbols other than “7” (for example, “111”, (A combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In the case where the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). When the received variable display result specifying command is the fifth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the small hit, a combination based on a specific rule in which three symbols are different from the loss or the big hit as stop symbols (for example, It is determined to be a combination of consecutive odd or even numbers such as "135" or "246". If the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a loss, a combination of decorative symbols (losing symbol) in which three symbols are irregular as stop symbols is determined.

  In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, a stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the countdown effect and the freeze effect in the variable display based on the variable display result and the variable pattern (138SGS358). The countdown effect in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment means that the counter image 138SG005a (see FIGS. 10-11) is displayed on the image display device 5 after the variable display is started, and the countdown is performed in the counter image 138SG005a. And informing whether or not a super-reach reach effect is to be executed based on the result of the countdown (whether or not the countdown has been completed). In addition, the freeze effect in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment is to temporarily stop the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol for three seconds from the fluctuating start timing as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A). This is an effect suggesting that the fluctuation display result will be a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, a small design 138SG005s whose vertical width and horizontal width are shorter than the decorative design is arranged, and the small design 138SG005s is The variable display can be displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative design.

  In the process of 138SGS358, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the fluctuation display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the non-execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 95%. The execution of the countdown effect in the failure pattern is determined by 5%, the execution of the countdown effect in the success pattern is determined by 0%, the execution of the freeze effect is determined by 0%, and the countdown effect. The execution in the success pattern and the execution of the freeze effect are determined at a rate of 0%.

  As shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the failure pattern of the countdown effect is such that the timer initial value of 10 seconds is displayed in the counter image 138SG005a from the start of the fluctuation, and the value is subtracted and updated (countdown). ) Is executed, and the countdown ends without being completed (9 seconds after the start of the countdown, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a changes to a failure mode (see FIG. 10-12 (I)). Is terminated without the value displayed in 0 being 0), and the success pattern of the countdown effect is a timer initial value from the fluctuation start timing as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B). 10 seconds are displayed in the counter image 138SG005a, and the value is subtracted and updated (count Is performed, and the countdown is completed (the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a becomes 0, and the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a changes to a successful mode (see FIG. 10-12 (H)). ) This is a production pattern.

  In the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, when the execution of both the countdown effect (success pattern) and the freeze effect is determined, as shown in FIG. The display of the change of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for three seconds from. Then, a value (7 seconds) obtained by subtracting 3 seconds from the timer initial value of 10 seconds (7 seconds) as a countdown effect is displayed in the counter image 138SG005a from the end timing of the freeze effect (the timing of 3 seconds from the start of the fluctuation). At the same time, the subtraction update (countdown) of the value is executed, and the countdown is completed (the value displayed in the image 138SG005a of the counter becomes 0, and the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter is successful (FIG. 10-12). (See (H))).

  In the characteristic part 138SG of the present embodiment, when the execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B), a mode in which the countdown effect is started from the end timing of the freeze effect. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing to start the countdown effect when the execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined is the timing immediately before or immediately after the end timing of the freeze effect (for example, (A timing one second before the end of the freeze effect or a timing one second after the end of the freeze effect).

  Further, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, when the execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined, the form in which the countdown effect is started from the end timing of the freeze effect as shown in FIG. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the freeze effect and the countdown effect, effects that can be executed from the fluctuation start timing (for example, an effect for operating the movable body 32, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) In the case of a pachinko game machine equipped with a light guide plate, such as an effect that emits light from the light guide plate, etc.), these effects are overlapped with the countdown effect from the end timing of the freeze effect. May be executed. In the case where a plurality of effects can be executed from the fluctuation start timing as described above, the ratio controlled to the big hit game state may be different depending on the number of these effects.

  When the fluctuation display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the non-execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution in the failure pattern of the countdown effect is performed at a rate of 0%. Decision, execution of the countdown effect in the success pattern is determined at a rate of 25%, execution of the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution of the countdown effect with the success pattern and execution of the freeze effect are 15%. Is determined by the ratio of

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, when the fluctuation display result is lost and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach, the non-execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 100%, and the countdown effect is performed. The execution pattern in the failure pattern is determined by 0%, the execution in the countdown production success pattern is determined by 0%, the execution of the freeze production is determined by 0%, and the countdown production success pattern And the execution of the freeze effect are determined at a rate of 0%. When the fluctuation display result is lost and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the non-execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and the execution in the failure pattern of the countdown effect is determined at a rate of 25%. The execution of the countdown effect in the success pattern is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the countdown effect in the success pattern and the execution of the freeze effect are determined by 0%. Determined by percentage. When the fluctuation display result is lost and the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the non-execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the execution of the countdown effect in the failure pattern is performed at a rate of 0%. Decision, the execution of the countdown effect in the success pattern is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the countdown effect with the success pattern and the execution of the freeze effect are 5%. Is determined by the ratio of

  If the fluctuation display result is a small hit and the fluctuation pattern is a special hit (small hit), the non-execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution in the countdown effect failure pattern is performed. It is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the countdown effect in the success pattern is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the freeze effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the countdown effect at the success pattern and the freeze operation are performed. Execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

  In other words, when the countdown effect is performed in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, if the variation pattern is a non-reach, a normal reach, or a special hit (small hit), the countdown effect is always executed in a failure pattern, and the change pattern is In the case of super reach, the countdown effect is always executed in a successful pattern. Furthermore, when both the freeze effect and the countdown effect are determined to be performed, the countdown effect is always executed in a success pattern, while the non-execution of the freeze effect and the execution of the countdown effect are determined. May be executed in a success pattern or in a failure pattern. In other words, when the freeze effect is executed and the countdown effect is executed, the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern at a higher rate than when the freeze effect is not executed and the countdown effect is executed. . In the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, when execution of both the freeze effect and the countdown effect is determined, a mode in which the countdown effect is always executed in a success pattern is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case where the countdown effect is executed in a failure pattern may be provided even when the execution of both the freeze effect and the countdown effect is determined.

  In addition, regarding the countdown effect and the freeze effect, when the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern and the freeze effect is executed, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high. When the freeze effect is executed, the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern, and the countdown effect is executed in the failure pattern. The rate at which the result is a jackpot: countdown effect (success pattern) + freeze effect> freeze effect> countdown effect (success pattern)> countdown effect (failure pattern)).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a countdown effect in the process of 138SGS358 (138SGS359). If it is determined in the process of 138SGS358 that the countdown effect is not to be executed (138SGS359; N), the process proceeds to 138SGS361, and if the execution of the countdown effect is determined in the process of 138SGS358 (138SGS359; Y), the change pattern and the change display result are displayed. Based on this, the effect of the countdown effect (the number and color of the counter images 138SG005a displayed on the image display device 5) is determined (138SGS360).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10C, when the variation pattern is super reach, if the variation display result is a big hit, one display of the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is reduced by 10%. , And one display of the image 138SG005a of the red counter is determined at a rate of 20%. Two displays of the image 138SG005a of the blue counter are determined at a rate of 30%. The two displays of the image 138SG005a are determined at a rate of 40%. If the result of the variable display is lost, one display of the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is determined at a rate of 10%, and one display of the image 138SG005a of the red counter is determined at a rate of 40%. The two displays of the blue counter image 138SG005a are determined at a rate of 30%, and the two displays of the red counter image 138SG005a are determined at a rate of 20%.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, if the fluctuation display result is a big hit, one display of the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is determined at a rate of 80%, and one display of the image 138SG005a of the red counter is determined. Are determined at a rate of 15%, two displays of a blue counter image 138SG005a are determined at a rate of 5%, and two displays of a red counter image 138SG005a are determined at a rate of 0%. . If the result of the variable display is lost, one display of the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is determined at a rate of 95%, and one display of the image 138SG005a of the red counter is determined at a rate of 5%. The two displays of the image 138SG005a of the blue counter are determined at a rate of 0%, and the two displays of the image 138SG005a of the red counter are determined at a rate of 0%.

  As described above, when the image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed as the countdown effect, the fluctuation display result is set to be a big hit at a higher rate than when the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed. At the same time, when two counter images 138SG005a are displayed as the countdown effect, the variation display result is set to be a big hit at a higher rate than when one counter image 138SG005a is displayed. More precisely, in the countdown effect, when the two images 138SG005a of the red counter are displayed, the ratio of the large fluctuation display result is the highest, and thereafter, the two images 138SG005a of the blue counter are displayed. In such a case, the setting is such that the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit becomes lower in the order of displaying one image 138SG005a of the red counter and displaying one image 138SG005a of the blue counter. (Rate at which the fluctuation display result becomes a big hit; two images 138SG005a of the red counter are displayed> two images 138SG005a of the blue counter are displayed> one image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed> the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed One display).

  Further, as described above, the case where the countdown effect is executed in the normal reach fluctuation pattern is the case where the countdown effect is executed in the failure pattern, and the case where the countdown effect is executed in the super reach fluctuation pattern. Is the case where the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern, so that when one blue counter image 138SG005a is displayed, one red counter image 138SG005a is displayed, or when the counter image is displayed. When the countdown effect is performed in a failure pattern at a higher rate than when two 138SG005a are displayed, that is, when the image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed or when two images 138SG005a of the counter are displayed. The blue counsel Is set to count down effect at a high rate is carried out by successful pattern than when the image 138SG005a of is one display.

  More specifically, the case where two images 138SG005a of the red counter are displayed is the highest when the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern, and the case where two images 138SG005a of the blue counter are displayed thereafter. In the case where one image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed, the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern is set to be lower in the order in which one image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed. .

  In the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D, when two red counter images 138SG005a are displayed, a countdown effect is required. Is set to be executed in the success pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when two red counter images 138SG005a are displayed, the countdown effect is executed in the failure pattern. A case may be provided.

  In the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, when the image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed, the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern at a higher rate than when the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed, the ratio is higher than when the image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed. The countdown effect may be executed in a success pattern.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, when the image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed, the variation display result is a big hit at a higher rate than when the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the image 138SG005a of the blue counter is displayed, the fluctuation display result is higher than when the image 138SG005a of the red counter is displayed. May be a big hit.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the counter 138SG005a of the displayed counter is different in the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern depending on whether the color is red or blue. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The counter image 138SG005a can be displayed in three or more colors, and a countdown effect is produced according to which of the three or more counter images 138SG005a is displayed. May be different in the success pattern.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, when two counter images 138SG005a are displayed, the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern at a higher rate than when one counter image 138SG005a is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When one counter image 138SG005a is displayed, the counter 138SG005a is displayed at a higher rate than when two counter images 138SG005a are displayed. The countdown effect may be executed in a success pattern.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, when two counter images 138SG005a are displayed, the variation display result is a big hit at a higher rate than when one counter image 138SG005a is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When one counter image 138SG005a is displayed, the fluctuation display result is higher than when two counter images 138SG005a are displayed. May be a big hit.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, an example in which the ratio at which the countdown effect is executed in a successful pattern differs depending on whether the number of displayed counter images 138SG005a is one or two is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display three or more counter images 138SG005a, and the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in a successful pattern varies depending on the number of displayed counter images 138SG005a. You may do so.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern and the rate at which the variable display result is a big hit are different depending on the color of the image 138SG005a of the counter and the number displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in a successful pattern and the fluctuation display result are a big hit depending on the color of the image 138SG005a of the counter and the number of displayed images. Only one of the ratios may be different.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern and the rate at which the variable display result is a big hit are different depending on the color of the image 138SG005a of the counter and the number displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to or instead of the color and the number of displayed images 138SG005a of the counter, according to the shape and size of the image 138SG005a of the counter. The rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern may be different from the rate at which the variable display result is a big hit.

  After the execution of the process of 138SGS360, or when the execution of the countdown effect is not determined (138SGS359; N), the effect control pattern according to the fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of the execution of the freeze effect or the countdown effect, and the effect mode of the countdown effect. (Process table) is selected (138SGS361). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (138SGS362).

  The process table includes display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and sound for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation section control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). I have.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the variable display, the freeze effect, and the countdown effect are executed based on one process table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display, the freeze effect, and the countdown effect may be individually executed based on different process tables.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (image display as effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (138SGS363). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 to cause the image display device 5 to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  In the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the decorative pattern to be displayed in a fluctuating manner according to the fluctuating pattern corresponding to the fluctuating pattern designation command on a one-to-one basis. May select a variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

  Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (138SGS364). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (138SG365). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data in the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, whereby the variation of the decorative design is realized. Next, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting processing ends (138SGS366).

  FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing the variable display effect processing (S172) in the effect control process processing. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the respective values of the process timer, the fluctuation time timer, and the fluctuation control timer by one (138SGS401, 138SGS402, 138SGS403). Further, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer has expired (138SGS404). When the process timer expires (138SGS404; Y), the process data is switched (138SGS405). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table to the process timer (138SGS406). Further, the control state of the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, and the like which are set next, and the process proceeds to 138SGS409 ( 138 SGS407). On the other hand, when the process timer has not expired (138SGS404; N), according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the effect device (effect components) is executed, and the process proceeds to 138SGS409 (138SGS408).

  In 138 SGS 409, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a freeze effect is being executed (138 SGS 409). When the freeze effect is being executed (138SGS409; Y), only the variation display of the small symbol 138SG005s of the decorative symbol and the small symbol 138SG005s is executed, the process proceeds to 138SGS412 (138SGS410), and the freeze effect is not being executed. In the case (138SGS409; N), the display of the decoration symbol and the small symbol 138SG005s is changed, and the process proceeds to 138SGS412 (138SGS411).

  Then, in 138 SGS 412, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is time to start execution of the countdown effect (138 SGS 412). If it is the timing to start the execution of the countdown effect (138SGS412; Y), it is further determined whether or not the freeze effect has been executed (138SGS413). If a freeze effect has been performed (138SGS413; Y), the countdown is started from a value (7 seconds) obtained by subtracting 3 seconds from the initial value of 10 seconds, and the process proceeds to 138SGS416 (138SGS414). If not (138SGS413; N), the countdown is started from the initial value of 10 seconds, and the process proceeds to 138SGS416 (138SGS415).

  If it is determined in 138SGS412 that it is not the timing to start the countdown effect (138SGS412; N), the process proceeds to 138SGS416 without executing the processes of 138SGS413 to 138SGS415.

  In 138 SGS 416, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the countdown effect (138 SGS 3416). If it is the end timing of the countdown effect (138SGS416; Y), it is determined whether or not the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern (138SGS417). When the countdown effect is being executed in a success pattern (138SGS417; Y), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter is notified of the execution of the super reach reach effect shown in FIG. 10-12 (H). (138SGS417; N). If the countdown effect is executed in a failure pattern (138SGS417; N), the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is changed to the failure mode (FIG. 10-12 (I)). The display mode is changed to a display mode notifying that the reach effect of the super reach is not executed, and the process proceeds to 138SGS420.

  In 138SGS420, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation control timer has expired (138SGS420). When the fluctuation control timer is out (138SGS420; Y), the next display screen of the left-middle-right decorative symbol or small symbol 138SG005s (the screen to be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switch of the effect symbol). Is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (138SGS421). In this way, in the image display device 5, the variation control of the decorative symbol is realized. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, the decorative design, the small design 138SG005s, and the like in the variation of the decorative design. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the fluctuation control timer, and the process proceeds to 138SGS423 (138SGS422).

  If the fluctuation control timer has not expired in 138SGS420 (138SGS420; N), the process proceeds to 138SGS423 without executing the processes of 138SGS421 and 138SGS422.

  In 138 SGS 423, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable time timer has expired (138 SGS 423). If the variable time timer is out (138SGS423; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the wait process per special figure (S173), and the variable display effect process ends (138SGS425). ). If the variable time timer has not expired (138SGS423; N), it is further determined whether or not the fixed command reception flag is set (138SGS424). If the confirmation command reception flag has not been set (138SGS424; N), the variable display effect processing ends, and if the confirmation command reception flag has been set (138SGS424; Y), the value of the production control process flag is specified. The value is set to a value corresponding to the per-diagram waiting process (S173), and the variable display effect process ends (138SGS425). For this reason, even if the fluctuation time timer is not timer-out, the control shifts to the control for stopping the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation designation command is received. For example, a fluctuation pattern indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards or the like. Even when the designated command is received, the variation of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the normal variation time has elapsed (at the end of the variation of the special symbol).

  In the process table used for the variation control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the change time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n has timed out in the process of 138SGS404, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the effect control of the decorative symbol based on the process table ends. I do.

  Note that the display of the counter image 138SG005a after the end of the countdown effect may be ended at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach or the end timing of the variable display.

  Next, a mode of the countdown effect and the freeze effect in the characteristic portion 138SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-11 to 10-13.

  First, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), when the non-execution of the freeze effect of the execution of the countdown effect is determined at the start timing of the new variable display, FIG. 10-11 (B) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11 (E), the counter image 138SG005a is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5, and the countdown is started in the counter image 138SG005a when the change starts. At this time, the counter image 138SG005a may be displayed in red or blue, and may be displayed one or two, and the counter image 138SG005a may be displayed. The rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern and the rate at which the variable display result is a big hit are different depending on the color and the number.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10F, the countdown is executed together with the fluctuation display, and when the value displayed in the image 138SG005a of the counter becomes 1 second (the countdown is executed for 9 seconds). If the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern, the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a is changed as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (G) and 10-12 (H). After 0 seconds (countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a successful mode (a display mode that notifies the execution of the super reach reach effect). On the other hand, if the countdown effect is executed in a failure pattern, the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a becomes 0 seconds (countdown is completed) as shown in FIG. 10-12 (I). Without this, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a changes to the failure mode (display mode for notifying the non-execution of the super-reach reach effect).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (J), when the execution of the freeze effect and the execution of the countdown effect are determined at the start timing of the new variable display, FIGS. 10-13 (K) and 10-13. As shown in (L), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol temporarily stops for three seconds from the timing of the fluctuation start during the execution period of the freeze effect.

  In addition, while the display of the decoration symbol is stopped as the freeze effect, the display of the change of the small symbol 138SG005s and the display of the change of the special symbol are executed without being stopped. By visually recognizing the variable display of the symbol, it can be recognized that the variable display is being performed even while the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped.

  Then, when the freeze effect for three seconds is completed, the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is restarted, and the countdown effect is started. As the countdown effect at this time, the countdown starts from the value (7 seconds) obtained by subtracting 3 seconds, which is the execution period of the freeze effect, from 10 seconds, which is the original initial value, in the image 138SG005a of the counter.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-13, when the execution of the freeze effect and the non-execution of the countdown effect are determined as shown in the processing of 138SGS409 to 138SGS411 in FIG. 10-10. Also, in 3 seconds from the timing of the start of the fluctuation during the execution of the freeze effect, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, while the fluctuation display of the small symbol 138SG005s and the special symbol is executed without stopping.

  As described above, the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention, the present invention will be described. include.

  For example, in the above embodiment, at the timing of starting the variable display, the counter image 138SG005a is displayed on the image display device 5 for the variable display so that the countdown effect can be executed. Is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A) to 10-14 (D) as a modified example 138SG-1, the image display device 5 is used for a variable display that has not been executed yet. May be displayed in advance, and the execution of the countdown effect may be notified in advance.

  In this case, in the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, the hold data of the special figure game in which the start winning has occurred but has not been started is stored as the hold memory, and the hold memory is generated when the hold memory occurs. It is configured to include a determination unit that can determine whether or not the resulting fluctuation display result is a big hit. Then, the effect control CPU 120 should be able to determine whether or not the generated hold storage is to be subjected to the countdown effect based on the determination result by the determination means.

  Furthermore, in such a case, the countdown effect is executed by displaying the counter image 138SG005a on the image display device 5 for the variable display from the timing of starting the variable display of the target, and by the determination of the determination unit. The counter 138SG005a is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing before the start of the variable display, and the execution of the countdown effect is notified in advance by displaying the counter image 138SG005a. Good. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timing at which the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed on the image display device 5, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In particular, when the counter image 138SG005a is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing before the start of the variable display and the execution of the countdown effect is announced, the image for the variable display is displayed from the timing at which the variable display is started. The counter image 138SG005a is displayed on the image display device 5 by displaying the counter image 138SG005a on the display device 5 at a higher rate than in the case where the countdown effect is executed by displaying the counter image 138SG005a. The player can be made to pay more attention to the timing at which it is performed.

  Further, in the modified example 138SG-1, as shown in FIG. 10B, the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing before the start of the variable display, and the execution of the countdown effect is announced. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the execution of the countdown effect is announced by displaying “preparing” or the like in the image 138SG005a of the counter.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the embodiment, when the non-execution of the freeze effect is determined, the mode in which the countdown effect is executed from the start timing of the variable display is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, even when the execution of the count-down effect is determined, the count-down effect may not be executed from the start timing of the variable display. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (A) to 10-15 (C) as a modified example 138SG-2, when the execution of the countdown effect is determined as the target of the variable display at the start of the variable display. First, a display mode (for example, a counter of a counter) indicating that a countdown effect is to be performed is performed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, an upper left portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-15 (B)). The image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed in the image 138SG005a in a display mode in which "preparation" or the like is displayed, and the process waits until the countdown effect start timing. Then, the countdown is started in the counter image 138SG005a from the start timing of the countdown effect.

  As described above, a plurality of periods can be determined as the standby period from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the countdown effect, and the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state according to the length of the standby period. The ratio and the ratio at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern are different (for example, as shown in FIG. 10C, when the standby period from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the countdown effect is long) Alternatively, the countdown effect may be executed in a success pattern at a higher rate than when the standby period from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the countdown effect is shorter. In this way, the player can be noticed whether or not the counter image 138SG005a is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display mode suggesting the execution of the countdown effect at the timing when the start winning is generated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the above-described embodiment, when the non-execution of the freeze effect and the execution of the countdown effect are determined, the countdown effect is executed for 10 seconds as a countdown effect. Is not limited to this. If non-execution of a freeze effect and execution of a countdown effect are determined, the execution period of the countdown is selected from a plurality of periods (for example, 5 seconds and 10 seconds) and executed. May be.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (A) and 10-16 (B) as the modified example 139SG-1, when the execution in the success pattern of the countdown effect is determined, the fluctuation display result If it is a big hit, the execution period of the countdown is determined to be 5 seconds at a rate of 30% and 10 seconds at a rate of 70%. If the variable display result is lost, the execution period of the countdown is set to 5 seconds at a rate of 80%. Determine for 10 seconds at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, when the execution in the failure pattern of the countdown effect is determined, the execution period of the countdown is determined to be 5 seconds at a rate of 50% and 10 seconds at a rate of 50% regardless of the fluctuation display result.

  That is, in the modification 139SG-1, when the countdown execution period is long (when the countdown execution period is determined to be 10 seconds), when the countdown execution period is short (when the countdown execution period is determined to be 5 seconds). ) Is set so that the ratio of controlling to the big hit gaming state (big hit expectation) is higher than that of the big hit gaming state.

  Here, the variation pattern of the super reach in the characteristic portion 138SG of the above-described embodiment always reaches the reach when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation. For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 (A) and 10-17 (B), when the countdown execution period is determined to be 5 seconds, a wait of 10 seconds from the countdown end timing to the reach timing is reached. When a period occurs and the countdown execution period is determined to be 10 seconds, a 5 second standby period occurs from the countdown end timing to the reach timing.

  That is, in the present modified example 139SG-1, by determining the countdown execution period, the standby period from the countdown end timing to the reach timing is short (the countdown execution period is 10 seconds and the standby period Is 5 seconds) than when the standby period from the countdown end timing to the reach timing is longer (when the countdown execution period is 5 seconds and the standby period is 10 seconds). The ratio controlled in the big hit gaming state (big hit expectation) is set high.

  In the characteristic part 138SG-1 of the present embodiment, the execution period of the countdown in the countdown effect is determined at a different rate from a plurality of periods according to the fluctuation display result, so that the timing from the countdown end timing to the reach timing is reached. Although the embodiment in which the waiting period is determined is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the waiting period from the countdown end timing to the reach timing may be different from a plurality of periods according to the variable display result. By determining in, the execution period of the countdown in the countdown effect may be determined.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 138SG-1 of the present embodiment, the mode in which the countdown period in the countdown effect is determined from 5 seconds and 10 seconds is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the countdown effect is not limited to this. May be determined from three or more periods.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the successful pattern of the countdown effect is performed for the super-reach reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect may be performed for effects other than the reach effect during the fluctuation display (for example, a chance-up effect performed during the super-reach reach effect). Further, in the case where the success pattern of the countdown effect is executed for the effect executed during the super-reach reach effect, the counter image 138SG005a is once notified of the execution of the super-reach reach effect after the countdown effect is executed. After the start of the reach effect of the super reach, the display mode may be further changed to a display mode for notifying the execution of the effect during the reach effect.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 (A) to 10-18 (E) as a modified example 139SG-2, first, when the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern, the counter image 138SG005a is displayed. The display mode is changed to a display mode for informing the execution of the super-reach reach effect. As shown in FIGS. 10-18 (B) to 10-18 (D), the counter image 138SG005a that has been changed to a display mode for notifying the execution of the super-reach reach effect is displayed in the display mode of the reach effect. It is maintained until the start timing. Then, when the reach effect of the super reach is started, the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter is changed to a display mode to notify the execution of the chance-up effect, and the chance-up effect is executed during the reach effect.

  Also, in the modified example 139-2, a form in which a plurality of effects to be a target of the countdown effect success pattern are provided is exemplified, and a mode in which the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter is changed to a display mode informing the execution of each mode. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. When a plurality of effects to be the target of the successful countdown effect pattern are provided as described above, the modified example 139SG-3 shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10E, the counter image 138SG005a after the execution of the countdown effect successful pattern is once concealed by the shutter image 138SG005b, the movable body 32, and the like, and the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is changed after the concealment is released. Whether it has changed, and which display style has changed to which display style. It may be it is possible to notice the skill person.

  In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 (B) to 10-19 (E), since the counter image 138SG005a is hidden by the shutter image 138SG005b, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a has been counted down. The ratio controlled in the jackpot game state is different between the case where the state does not change from the mode and the case where the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is changed to the display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect and the chance-up effect of the super reach. This allows the player to pay more attention to whether or not the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a changes due to the counter image 138SG005a being hidden by the shutter image 138SG005b, and to which display mode the display mode has changed. Can be Kill.

  In addition, in the modified example 139SG-3, the execution period of the countdown effect and the execution period of the super reach reach effect and the chance-up effect are not overlapped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least a part of the execution period of the countdown effect and the execution period of the super-reach reach effect or the chance-up effect may overlap.

  If the execution period of the countdown effect and the execution period of the super-reach reach or the chance-up effect partially overlap as described above, in the overlapping period, the performance of the reach reach or the opportunity-up effect of the par-reach is performed. The image 138SG005a of the counter, which is a display mode that informs the user, is once concealed by the shutter image 138SG005b, and during the concealment solution, the execution of the suggestion effect indicating that the image 138SG005a of the counter is controlled to another big hit game state is executed. It may be changed to a display mode to notify.

  In this way, even after the countdown is completed and the super-reach reach or chance-up effect is started, the counter image 138SG005a is concealed by the shutter image 138SG005b, or the counter image is not displayed. The player can pay attention to whether or not the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a notification mode for notifying the execution of another suggested effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the modification 139SG-3, the counter image 138SG005a after the execution of the countdown effect successful pattern is hidden by the shutter image 138SG005b, thereby making it difficult to view the counter image 138SG005a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, the counter image 138SG005a is made difficult to visually recognize by reducing the size of the counter image 138SG005a, moving the counter image 138SG005a, or concealing only part of the counter image 138SG005a. For example, if it is a form that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize, it may not be completely invisible to the player.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the above-described embodiment, when the execution of the freeze effect is determined, as the freeze period, the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped for 3 seconds from the start timing of the variation display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 10-20 (A) to 10-20 (D) as a modified example 140SG-1, the display timing is changed from the start timing of the variable display as the freeze period. The period during which the variable display of symbols is stopped may be determined from a plurality of periods (for example, 1 second and 3 seconds).

  In this manner, when it is possible to determine the period for stopping the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol from 1 second and 3 seconds from the start timing of the fluctuating display as the freeze period, the game is performed in accordance with the length of the froze period. The rate at which the state is controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit expectation) differs (in FIGS. 10-20, the freeze period is longer (3 seconds) than the freeze period is shorter (1 second). The big hit expectation may be high).

  As described above, when it is possible to determine, from a plurality of periods, a period in which the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is stopped from the start timing of the fluctuating display as the freeze period, both the execution of the freeze effect and the execution of the countdown effect When it is determined, at the end timing of the freeze effect, the timer count effect may be started from a value obtained by subtracting the freeze period from the initial value (10 seconds).

  Further, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the above embodiment, when the execution of the countdown effect and the execution of the freeze effect are determined, the freeze effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (J) to 10-13 (M). The example in which the counter image 138SG005a is displayed on the image display device 5 from the end timing and the countdown effect is executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 140SG-2 shown in FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D, when the execution of the countdown effect and the execution of the freeze effect are determined, the freeze effect is executed from the start timing of the variable display, and the image display device 5 displays the freeze effect. A display mode suggesting that a countdown effect is to be performed on the counter image 138SG005a (for example, the counter image 13 And displayed in the display mode for performing display of "in preparation", etc.) in the SG005a, it may perform the countdown performance by changing the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter from the end timing of the freeze production. By doing so, during the execution of the freeze effect, the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter does not change together with the stop of the change display of the decorative symbol, so that the freeze effect and the countdown effect can be matched.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the embodiment, the countdown effect and the freeze effect are exemplified as the effects that can be executed from the start timing of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited thereto. As the execution from the start timing, in addition to the freeze effect, an effect of operating the movable body 32, an effect of displaying a specific character on the image display device 5, or the like may be executable.

  In the modification 140SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 (B) to 10-21 (D), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed as “preparing” during the execution of the freeze effect. Although the form which does not change from the state where it has been illustrated is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even during the execution of the freeze effect, the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the freeze effect ( For example, from 0.5 seconds after the start of the freeze effect), the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a may be changed from a state in which "in preparation" is displayed to a state in which an initial countdown value is displayed.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 138SG of the above-described embodiment, as an example of the predetermined effect in the present invention, a form in which the countdown effect of notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach by the completion of the countdown can be executed can be executed. The present invention is not limited to this. As the predetermined effect in the present invention, for example, a count-up from “0” to “100” is executed, and the count-up is completed (the count-up reaches “100”). A non-countdown effect, such as a battle effect that informs the execution of the super-reach reach effect by informing a super-reach reach effect by performing a super-reach reach effect, or a battle effect that informs the super-reach-reach effect effect by informing the ally character that the ally character has won the enemy character by victory May be executable. That is, the predetermined effect in the present invention is an effect indicating a period until a super-reach reach effect is started, such as the countdown effect shown in the characteristic portion 138SG of the embodiment, or the count-up effect described above. Effects other than effects that indicate the period until the super-reach reach effect starts by counting are also included.

  Also, in the feature section 138SG of the above-described embodiment, when two counter images 138SG005a are displayed as the countdown effect, both of them are directed to the super-reach reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and when displaying two counter images 138SG005a as a countdown effect, the target effects may be different in these two counter images 138SG005a. In the case where the effects to be targeted are different between the images 138SG005a of the two counters as described above, an effect corresponding to the image 138SG005a of either counter is executed by providing a case where only one of the countdowns is completed. Alternatively, the player may be allowed to pay attention.

  In the modified example 139SG-1, after the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a becomes 0 seconds (countdown is completed), the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is maintained until the reach timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the modified example 139SG-1, the value displayed in the image 138SG005a of the counter becomes 0 seconds (the countdown is completed). In this case, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a may be changed to a mode (for example, a mode of turning on the display of “standby” or “0 second”) indicating that the image is waiting until the reach timing. This makes it clearer that the status indicates that the player is in the waiting state, and allows the player to pay more attention to the period from the waiting state until the display mode changes, thereby improving the interest. it can.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the title corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach is displayed from the start of the reach effect of the super reach (the characteristic portion 31AK of FIGS. 8-1 to 8-12), and the main substrate 11 ( The CPU 103) can set any one of a plurality of set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and stores a set secret value obtained by converting the set value in the RAM 102, and the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). On the side, a form in which a suggestion effect (morning background effect) indicating the set value is executable (the characteristic portion 122SG in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-27) is performed. It is possible to execute the countdown effect with a success pattern according to the production mode of these countdown effects and whether or not to execute the freeze effect. The proportion to be lines disclosed different forms (features 138SG in Figure 10-1 Figure 10-21), the pachinko game machine 1 may be applied a plurality of features of these features.

  For example, in a case where the characteristic unit 122SG and the characteristic unit 138SG are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a countdown effect execution ratio, a freeze effect execution ratio, a ratio in which the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern (or a failure pattern), and the like. May be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As described above, the feature 138SG of the embodiment includes the following invention. That is, as a conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-212762. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-212762, when the countdown effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the countdown is always completed (in a specific mode). There is a problem that the player cannot be noticed and the entertainment of the countdown effect cannot be improved. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the invention 138SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a super-reach reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and display a predetermined display (for example, an image 138SG005a of a counter) on the display means, and display the predetermined display. An effect execution means (for example, a predetermined effect (for example, a countdown effect) in which the display mode is a specific mode (for example, a super reach notification mode shown in FIG. For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10-10).
With
The effect execution means performs a predetermined operation (for example, countdown) using the predetermined display, and a success pattern in which the display mode becomes the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. After the value displayed in the 138SG005a becomes 0 seconds (the countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a success mode (a display mode for notifying the execution of the super-reach reach effect). Pattern) and a failure pattern (for example, the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a becomes 0 seconds) in which a predetermined operation (for example, countdown) using the predetermined display is performed and the display mode does not become the specific mode. The display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter is changed to the failure mode (the countdown is not completed). By varying pattern) and a display mode) of notifying the non-execution of the reach demonstration of Parichi be capable of executing a predetermined effect,
There are a plurality of display modes of the predetermined display when the predetermined operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-11, a portion where the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed in blue or red),
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed differs depending on the display mode when the predetermined operation of the predetermined display is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D)). The ratio at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern is different depending on the color of the counter image 138SG005a displayed on the image display device 5.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above feature is provided, and according to this feature, interest in a predetermined effect can be improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of invention 138SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a super-reach reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and specify a display mode of a predetermined display (for example, a counter image 138SG005a) displayed on the display unit. An effect executing means (for example, effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a countdown effect) in a mode (for example, a super-reach notification mode shown in FIG. 10-18 (B)) in response to the execution of the suggested effect. CPU 120 for executing the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 10-10);
With
The effect executing means,
A success pattern in which the display mode becomes the specific mode by a predetermined operation (for example, countdown) using the predetermined display (for example, the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a as shown in FIG. 10-12 (G)) Becomes 0 seconds (the countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a successful mode (a display mode that notifies the execution of the super-reach reach effect), and the display mode is as described above. A failure pattern that does not become a specific mode (for example, the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter is changed to a failure mode (the reach reach of super reach) without the value displayed in the image 138SG005a of the counter becoming 0 seconds (countdown is completed) Pattern) that changes to a display mode that informs non-execution) It is capable of executing a predetermined performance,
In the predetermined effect, a plurality of the predetermined displays can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 11, one or two counter images 138SG005a are displayed),
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed differs depending on the number of the predetermined displays (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D), the countdown effect becomes a success pattern). The rate of execution differs depending on the number of counter images 138SG005a displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, interest in a predetermined effect can be improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the invention 138 SG,
The ratio controlled in the advantageous state differs depending on the mode of the predetermined display, the number of the predetermined displays, or a combination thereof (for example, FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D)). As shown in the figure, the ratio controlled in the jackpot game state is different depending on the color and the number of the counter images 138SG005a displayed on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, it is possible to further increase the attention to the predetermined display and to grasp the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state by the predetermined effect. , Can improve the entertainment interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the invention 138SG,
A gaming machine (eg, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display,
Hold storage means capable of storing information related to variable display as hold storage (for example, as shown in a modified example 138SG-1, a special drawing that has started but has not yet started on the main board 11 or the effect control board 12) Part that stores the game's hold data as hold memory),
Deciding means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-6) capable of deciding to control the advantageous state for each variable display;
A determination unit (for example, a determination unit according to a modified example 138SG-1) that determines whether or not the hold storage stored in the hold storage unit is controlled to the advantageous state before the determination by the determination unit;
With
The effect execution means is capable of displaying the predetermined display during execution of the target variable display which is the object of the determination based on the determination by the determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 10-6). The variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 7), the execution of the countdown effect can be determined by executing the variable display start setting process described above). A predetermined display can be displayed (for example, as shown in a modified example 138SG-1, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can determine the execution of the countdown effect based on the determination result of the determining means),
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed differs between when the predetermined display is started before the start of the target variable display and when the display is started during the target variable display (for example, in a modified example). As shown in 138SG-1, when the countdown effect is executed for the variable display from the timing at which the variable display is started, a counter is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing before the variable display is started by the determination means. (The portion where the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern differs in the case where the image 138SG005a is displayed and the execution of the countdown effect is announced in advance.)
A gaming machine characterized by the following is described. According to this feature, attention can also be paid to the time when the predetermined display is displayed, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the invention 138SG,
The effect execution means may include a plurality of start modes (for example, FIGS. 10-15 (A) to 10- 10 as a modified example 138SG-2) having different periods from when the predetermined display is displayed to when the predetermined operation is started. 15 (C), when the period from the start of the change to the start of the countdown is long or short), the predetermined effect can be executed,
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed differs depending on the period until the predetermined operation is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (A) to 10-15 (C) as a modified example 138SG-2). As shown, when the waiting period from the start of the change to the start of the countdown is long, the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern at a higher rate than when the standby period from the start of the change to the start of the countdown is short.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and attention can be paid to a period from when a predetermined display is displayed to when a predetermined operation is started, so that amusement of a game can be improved.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-212762. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-221762, when a countdown effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the player always enters a mode after the countdown is completed (in a specific mode). There is a problem that it is not possible to raise the interest of directing, and it is not possible to improve the entertainment of the production. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as means 1 of invention 139SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a super-reach reach effect) indicating that the vehicle is controlled to be in the advantageous state, and display a predetermined display (for example, a counter image 138SG005a) on the display means and display the predetermined display. The predetermined operation (for example, countdown effect) is performed by performing the predetermined operation (for example, countdown) used and setting the display mode of the predetermined display to a specific mode (for example, a super-reach notification mode shown in FIG. 10-18 (B)). Effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 10-10) which can be executed in response to the execution of the suggested effect;
With
The effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect such that the period from when the display mode of the predetermined display becomes the specific mode to when the suggested effect is executed is different (for example, the modification 139SG- 1 as shown in FIGS. 10-17),
The ratio controlled in the advantageous state differs depending on the length of the period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17 as a modified example 139SG-1, the big hit expectation degree depends on the waiting period from the end of the countdown to the reach). Different parts)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the interest in the performance can be improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the invention 139SG,
The effect executing means,
As the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, a super-reach reach effect and a chance-up effect illustrated in FIG. 10-18 as a modified example 139SG-2),
As the predetermined effect, after the predetermined display has changed to the specific mode, an effect of changing the predetermined display to a notification mode of notifying the type of the corresponding suggested effect can be executed (for example, Modification 139SG-2). As shown in FIGS. 10-18 (A) and 10-18 (B), after the countdown is completed, the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter is changed to a display mode informing the execution of the super-reach reach effect. part),
In the predetermined effect, after the predetermined display becomes the specific mode, the predetermined display of the notification mode can be continuously displayed until the corresponding suggestion effect is started (for example, FIG. 10-18 (B) As shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. 10D, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is maintained until the start timing of the reach effect in the display mode for notifying the execution of the reach effect of the super reach.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the predetermined display even during a period from when the predetermined display becomes the specific mode until the corresponding suggestion effect is started, Enhance the entertainment of the production.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the invention 139SG,
The effect executing means,
As the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, a super-reach reach effect and a chance-up effect illustrated in FIG. 10-18 as a modified example 139SG-2),
As the predetermined effect, after the predetermined display is in the specific mode, the type of the suggestion effect not corresponding to the predetermined display is executed, and an effect of changing to the notification mode of notifying the corresponding type of the suggestion effect is executed. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 (B) to 10-18 (E) as a modified example 139SG-2), after the countdown is completed, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is set to super reach reach. Is changed to a display mode notifying the execution of the chance-up effect, and then a display mode notifying the execution of the chance-up effect.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the user pay attention to which type of suggestion effect the predetermined display corresponds to even after the specific mode has been achieved. You can improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the invention 139SG,
The effect executing means,
A part of the predetermined effect including the execution period of any of the suggestion effects of the plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, the super-reach reach effect and the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 10-18 as the modified example 139SG-2). It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the predetermined display during the period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B) as a modified example 139SG-3, a portion where the image 138SG005a of the counter is hidden by the shutter image 138SG005b). ,
After making it difficult to visually recognize the predetermined display, a first pattern for continuing the specific mode of the predetermined display (for example, as shown in FIG. 10C as a modified example 139SG-3, an image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed. And the second pattern for changing the predetermined display to the notification mode (for example, FIGS. 10-19 (D) and 10-19 as a modified example 139SG-3). As shown in (E), the predetermined effect can be executed by a pattern in which the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a display mode informing the execution of the super-reach reach effect and the chance-up effect.
The ratio of the first pattern and the second pattern controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in a modified example 139SG-3, the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a changes from the display mode in which the countdown is completed) (A portion where the control mode of the jackpot game state is different depending on whether the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is changed to a display mode informing the execution of the reach effect or the chance-up effect of the super reach)
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to what kind of suggestive effect the predetermined display changes to the notification mode, thereby improving the interest of the effect. .

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the invention 139SG,
The effect executing means may include a success pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (G), a counter image 138SG005a) in which the display mode becomes the specific mode by a predetermined operation (for example, countdown) using the predetermined display. After the value displayed in the counter reaches 0 seconds (countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a successful mode (a display mode that notifies execution of the super-reach reach effect). And a failure pattern in which the display mode does not become the specific mode (for example, the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a becomes 0 second (countdown is completed), and the display mode of the counter image 138SG005a is the failure mode ( Display mode to notify the non-execution of the super-reach reach effect) Be capable of executing the predetermined presentation by the turn),
There are a plurality of display modes when performing the predetermined operation of the predetermined display (for example, a portion where the image 138SG005a of the counter is displayed in blue or red as shown in FIGS. 10 to 11).
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed varies depending on the display mode when the predetermined operation of the predetermined display is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D), (The ratio at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern is different depending on the color of the counter image 138SG005a displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, interest in a predetermined effect can be improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the invention 139SG,
The ratio controlled in the advantageous state differs depending on the mode of the predetermined display, the number of the predetermined displays, or a combination thereof (for example, FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D)). As shown in the figure, the rate at which the countdown effect is executed in the success pattern is different depending on the number of counter images 138SG005a displayed on the image display device 5.)
According to this feature, it is possible to further increase the attention to the predetermined display and to grasp the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state by the predetermined effect. , Can improve the entertainment interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 7 of the invention 139SG,
A gaming machine (eg, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display,
Hold storage means capable of storing information related to variable display as hold storage (for example, as shown in a modified example 138SG-1, a special drawing that has started but has not yet started on the main board 11 or the effect control board 12) Part that stores the game's hold data as hold memory),
Deciding means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-6) capable of deciding to control the advantageous state for each variable display;
A determination unit (for example, a determination unit according to a modified example 138SG-1) that determines whether or not the hold storage stored in the hold storage unit is controlled to the advantageous state before the determination by the determination unit;
With
The effect executing means determines that the predetermined display is in the specific mode in the success pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (G), the value displayed in the image 138SG005a of the counter becomes 0 second ( After the countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a success mode (a display mode informing the execution of the super-reach reach effect) and a failure pattern that does not become the specific mode (for example, the counter The display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a failure mode (a display mode for notifying the non-execution of the super-reach reach effect) without the value displayed in the image 138SG005a becoming 0 seconds (countdown is completed). Pattern), the predetermined effect can be executed, and the The predetermined display can be displayed during the execution of the target variable display that has been the object of the determination based on the determination (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 executing the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-6). The predetermined display can be displayed before the target variable display based on the hold storage, which is the target of the determination, is executed based on the determination by the determination unit (for example, a deformation). As shown in Example 138SG-1, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can determine the execution of the countdown effect based on the determination result of the determination means),
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed is different between when the predetermined display is started before the start of the target variable display and when the display is started during the execution of the target variable display (for example, the deformation As shown in Example 138SG-1, when the countdown effect is executed for the variable display from the timing at which the variable display is started, and when the variable display is started by the determination means, the image display device 5 (The part where the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern differs in the case where the counter image 138SG005a is displayed to notify the execution of the countdown effect.)
A gaming machine characterized by the following is described. According to this feature, attention can also be paid to the time when the predetermined display is displayed, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 8 of the invention 139SG,
The effect executing means may determine that the predetermined display is in the specific mode in the success pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (G), the value displayed in the counter image 138SG005a is 0 second ( After the countdown is completed), the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a success mode (a display mode informing the execution of the super-reach reach effect) and a failure pattern that does not become the specific mode (for example, the counter The display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter changes to a failure mode (a display mode for notifying the non-execution of the super-reach reach effect) without the value displayed in the image 138SG005a becoming 0 seconds (countdown is completed). Pattern), the predetermined effect can be executed, and the predetermined display is displayed. A plurality of start modes (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (A) to 10-15 (C) as modified examples 138SG-2) having different periods from the start to the start of the predetermined operation as shown in FIGS. The predetermined effect can be executed in the case where the period from the start to the countdown is long or short)
The rate at which the predetermined effect of the success pattern is executed differs depending on the period until the predetermined operation is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (A) to 10-15 (C) as a modified example 138SG-2). As shown, when the waiting period from the start of the change to the start of the countdown is long, the countdown effect is executed in a success pattern at a higher rate than when the standby period from the start of the change to the start of the countdown is short.)
According to this feature, a gaming machine is described. According to this feature, attention can be paid to a period until a predetermined operation is started.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-212762. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-212762, when there is an effect (special effect) other than the specific effect that can be executed from the start of the variable display, the special effect is performed at an appropriate timing. There is a problem that if it is not performed, interest will decrease. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as means 1 of invention 140SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player. ,
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a freeze effect) in which the effect identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner for a predetermined period from the start of the variable display, and the effect is different from the specific effect and is controlled to the advantageous state. Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display shown in FIGS. 10-10) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a countdown effect) indicating that the effect is performed when the variable display is started. Part),
When executing the specific effect, the effect executing means can execute the special effect when the predetermined period elapses (for example, when the execution of the countdown effect and the freeze effect is determined, FIG. As shown in FIG. 9 (B), the part where the countdown effect starts from the end timing of the freeze effect)
According to this feature, a special effect is executed at an appropriate timing after a predetermined period corresponding to the specific effect has elapsed, so that a decrease in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 2 of the invention 140SG,
The ratio controlled in the advantageous state is different between the case where the specific effect and the special effect are executed and the case where the special effect is executed without executing the specific effect (for example, FIG. 10-7). As shown in the figure, when the countdown effect and the freeze effect are executed, the ratio of the change display result to the big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be the highest, and only the countdown effect is executed without executing the freeze effect. In this case, the part where the fluctuation display result is a big hit is set lower than when the countdown effect and the freeze effect are executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to make a player pay attention to whether or not a specific effect is executed, and to enhance interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 3 of the invention 140SG,
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect in a plurality of modes having different lengths of the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion in which a freeze effect can be executed in the case of seconds and in a case of 3 seconds), and the special effect can be executed at a timing corresponding to the length of the predetermined period of the specific effect to be executed (for example, a modified example) As shown in FIGS. 10-20 as 140SG-1, a portion capable of executing a countdown effect from the timing when each freeze period has elapsed),
The ratio controlled in the advantageous state differs according to the length of the predetermined period (for example, when the freeze period is 3 seconds as shown in FIG. The part where the fluctuation display result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is higher than when the period is 1 second)
According to this feature, a special effect can be executed at an appropriate timing corresponding to a specific effect having a different period, and the player can pay attention to the length of the predetermined period. And can improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the invention 140SG,
It is possible to execute variable display of small production identification information (for example, small design 138SG005s) smaller than the production identification information in synchronization with the variable display of the production identification information,
The variable display of the small effect identification information is also executed when the effect identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (L), during the execution of the freeze effect). , While the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 138SG005s is executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and even when production identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific production, it is possible to recognize that variable display is being executed by small production identification information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the invention 140SG,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying at least an image related to the special effect,
The effect execution means can display a suggestion image indicating that the special effect is executed at least during execution of the specific effect on the display means (for example, FIG. 10-21 as a modified example 140SG-2). As shown in B), a portion displaying the image 138SG005a of the counter displayed as “under preparation” on the image display device 5),
During the execution of the specific effect, the display mode of the suggestion image is not changed (for example, as illustrated in FIGS. 10-21 (B) to 10-21 (D) as a modified example 140SG-2, the execution of the freeze effect) (The part where the display mode of the image 138SG005a of the counter is not changed from the state in which “Preparing” is displayed)
According to this feature, during the execution of the specific effect, the display mode of the suggestion image does not change together with the stop display of the effect identification information, so that the specific effect Matching can be achieved.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko gaming machine 2 Game board 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 103 CPU
120 Effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of effect identification information and being controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a specific effect of stopping and displaying the effect identification information in a specific manner for a predetermined period from the start of the variable display, and to indicate that the effect is different from the specific effect and is controlled to the advantageous state. It is provided with an effect execution means capable of executing a special effect when the variable display is started,
The gaming machine, wherein the effect executing means is capable of executing the special effect when the predetermined period elapses when executing the specific effect.

Images